number answered by someone who is knowledgeable about the Project. An answering machine shall not be connected to either number. e. For residences, be prepared on 65 -lb. brightly colored card stock or equivalent durability with contrasting, 12 -point font or larger printing; pre -cut in a manner for hanging on a doorknob; and minimum size of 3 -1/2 inches wide by 8-1/2 inches long (refer to the appendices for an example).
f. Be approved by the Engineer prior to distribution.
5. The Contractor shall post “No Parking” signs 72 hours in advance of the Work. The signs shall state the date and time of parking restriction for a duration not to exceed the time necessary to complete the Work at that location. If the Work is delayed or re scheduled, the signs shall be removed and re-posted 72 hours in advance of the rescheduled Work.
6. Payment for public convenience shall be considered as included in the Contract Price for each item in the Bid and no additional payment will be made.
ADD 3-16 SITE ACTIVITIES BY THE AGENCY OR SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 3-16.1 The Agency’s Right to Award Separate Contracts.
1. The Agency reserves the right to perform work or operations outside the Scope of Work of the Contract related to the Project with Agency Forces, Separate Contractors, or both. If work to be performed by another party was not noted in the Contract, the Agency shall give written notice to Contractor 10 Working Days prior to the start of any Work. If Contractor determines that the work being performed by the Agency or others may interfere with or cause damage to Work being performed by Contractor, notify the Engineer in writing within 3 Working Days of the Engineer’s notice.
3-16.2 Integration of the Work with Separate Contractors.
1. When specified in the Contract Documents, prepare a plan to integrate the work performed by Separate Contractors, Agency Forces, or both with the performance of the Work and submit the plan to the Engineer for approval. The plan shall be fair and reasonabl e for Contractor and the Separate Contractors. Work with Separate Contractors to reach an agreement for the prepared plan. Arrange the performance of the work so that the Work and the work of the Separate Contractors are, to the extent applicable, properly integrated and jointed in a manner that avoids any damage to the Work or to the work of the Separate Contractors.
3-16.3 Coordination.
1. Coordinate Contractor’s activities and the Schedule with the activities and schedules of the Separate Contractors and make any revisions to the Schedule deemed necessary to avoid any disruption to the Work or to the work of the Separate Contractors. 3-16.4 Use of Site.
1. Provide the Agency and the Separate Contractors reasonable opportunities for the storage of materials and equipment and performance of their work. Connect and coordinate work and operations with the work and operations of the Agency and the Separate Contra ctors as required by the Contract Documents.
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
2. Coordinate traffic control with the Separate Contractors for other projects and minimize the impact to the community. Prior to the start of construction, submit Contractor’s plan for coordination.
3-16.5 Deficiency in Work of Separate Contractors.
1. If part of Contractor’s Work depends on proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Agency or a Separate Contractor, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Separate Contractor and the Engineer any a pparent discrepancies or defects in construction that would render it unsuitable for proper execution and results. Use good faith efforts to resolve any such discrepancies or defects or any related disagreements. Contractor’s failure to report constitutes Contractor’s acceptance of the Work of Separate Contractors as fit, proper, and coordinated with the Work. 3-16.6 Payment.
1. Payment for reporting deficiencies, coordinating, and resolving discrepancies shall be included in the Contract Price.
SECTION 4 – CONTROL OF MATERIALS
4-1 PROTECTION
ADD the following:
1. The Contractor shall repair or replace any equipment and materials in the event of vandalism, damage, or theft at no additional cost to the Agency.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of public and private property adjacent to the Work and shall exercise due caution to avoid damage to such property.
3. All costs to the Contractor for protecting, removing, and restoring existing improvements shall be included in the Bid.
4. The Agency and affected utility companies have, by a search of known records, endeavored to locate and indicate on the Plans, all utilities which exist within the limits of the Work.
However, the accuracy and/or completeness of the nature, size and/or loc ation of utilities indicated on the Plans is not guaranteed.
5. The Contractor shall determine the location and depth of all utilities, including service connections, which have been marked by the respective owners and which may affect or be affected by its operations. If no pay item is provided in the Contract for thi s Work, full compensation for such Work shall be considered as included in the prices Bid for other items of Work.
6. The Contractor shall not interrupt the service function or disturb the support of any utility without authority from the owner or order from the Agency. All valves, switches, vaults, and meters shall be maintained readily accessible for emergency shutoff.
7. Where protection is required to ensure support of utilities located as shown on the Plans or in accordance with Section 5-1, the Contractor shall, unless otherwise provided, furnish, and place the necessary protection at its expense.
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
8. Upon learning of the existence and location of any utility omitted from or shown incorrectly on the Plans, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer in writing. When authorized by the Engineer, support or protection of the utility will be paid for.
9. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer and the utility owner if any utility is disturbed or damaged. The Contractor shall bear the costs of repair or replacement of any utility damaged if located.
10. When placing concrete around or contiguous to any non -metallic utility installation, the Contractor shall at its expense:
a. Furnish and install a 2 -inch cushion of expansion joint material or other similar resilient material; or
b. Provide a sleeve or other opening which will result in a 2-inch minimum-clear annular space between the concrete and the utility; or
c. Provide other acceptable means to prevent embedment in or bonding to the concrete.
11. Where concrete is used for backfill or for structures which would result in embedment, or partial embedment, of a metallic utility installation; or where the coating, bedding or other cathodic protection system is exposed or damaged by the Contractor’s ope rations, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer and arrange to secure the advice of the affected utility owner regarding the procedures required to maintain or restore the integrity of the system.
12. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall remove all interfering portions of utilities shown on the Plans or indicated in the Bid documents as “abandoned” or “to be abandoned in place.” Before starting removal operations, the Contractor shall ascertain from the Agency whether the abandonment is complete, and the costs involved in the removal and disposal shall be included in the Bid for the items of Work necessitating such removals.
13. When feasible, the owner is responsible for utilities within the area affected by the Work will complete their necessary installations, relocations, repairs, or replacements before commencement of Work by the Contractor. When the Plans or Specifications indicate that a utility installation is to be relocated, altered, or constructed by others, the Agency will conduct all negotiations with the owners and work will be done at no cost to the Contractor, except for manhole frame and cover sets to be brought to grade as provided in the Contract Documents. Utilities which are relocated to avoid interference shall be protected in their position and the cost of such protection shall be included in the Bid for the items of Work necessitating such relocation.
14. After award of the Contract, portions of utilities which are found to interfere with the Work will be relocated, altered, or reconstructed by the owners, or the Engineer may order changes in the Work to avoid interference. Such changes will be paid.
15. When the Plans or Specifications provide for the Contractor to alter, relocate, or reconstruct a utility, all costs for such Work shall be included in the Bid for the items of Work necessitating such Work. Temporary or permanent relocation or alteration of utilities requested by the Contractor for its convenience shall be its responsibility and it shall make all arrangements and bear all costs.
16. The utility owner will relocate service connections as necessary within the limits of the Work or within temporary construction or slope easements. When directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall arrange for the relocation of service connections as nec essary between the
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
meter and property line, or between a meter and the limits of temporary construction or slope easements. The relocation of such service connections will be paid and will include the restoration of all existing improvements which may be affected by the relocation . The Contractor may agree with the owner of any utility to disconnect and reconnect interfering service connections. The Agency will not be involved in any such agreement.
17. Contractor shall coordinate the Work with utility agencies and companies. Prior to the installation of any and all utility structures within the limits of work by any utility agency or company, or its contractor, the Contractor shall place all curb or curb and gutter that is a part of the Work and adjacent to the location where such utility structures are shown on the Plans and are noted as being located, relocated or are otherwise shown as installed by others. In order to minimize delays to the Contractor caused by the failure of other parties to relocate utilities that interfere with the construction, the Contractor, upon the Engineer’s approval, may be permitted to temporarily omit the portion of Work affected by the utility. If such temporary omission is approved by the Engineer, the Contractor shall place survey or other physical control markers sufficient to locate the curb or curb and gutter to the satisfaction of the utility agency or company. Such temporary omission shall be for the Contractor’s convenience and no additional compensation will be allowed therefore or for additional work, materials or delay associated with the temporary omission. The portion thus omitted shall be constructed by the Contractor immediately following the relocation of the utility involved unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
18. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of its Construction Schedule insofar as it affects the protection, removal, or relocation of utilities. The notification shall be included as a part of the Construction Schedule. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of any subsequent changes in the Construction Schedule which will affect the time available for protection, removal, or relocation of utilities.
19. The Contractor will not be entitled to damages or additional payment for delays attributable to utility relocations or alterations if correctly located, noted, and completed.
20. The Contractor may be given an extension of time for unforeseen delays attributable to unreasonably protracted interference by utilities in performing the Work correctly shown on the Plans.
21. The Agency will assume responsibility for the timely removal, relocation, or protection of existing main or trunkline utility facilities within the area affected by the Work if such utilities are not identified in the Contract Documents. The Contractor will not be assessed liquidated damages for any delay caused by failure of Agency to provide for the timely removal, relocation, or protection of such existing facilities.
22. The Contractor will be compensated for damages incurred due to delays for which the Agency is responsible or for delays attributable to interferences, relocations, or alterations not covered by the Contract Documents. These damages for delay will be determ ined by the Engineer. The Agency shall not be liable for damages which could have been avoided by the judicious handling of forces, equipment, or plant. These avoidable damages will be determined by the Engineer. The Engineer may grant Contractor an extens ion of time for damages due to delay.
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
23. When necessary, the Contractor shall so conduct its operations as to permit access to the Work Site and provide time for utility work to be accomplished during the progress of the Work.
4-2 INSPECTION
4-2.1 General
ADD the following:
1. All costs of inspection at the source, including salaries and mileage costs, shall be paid by the Contractor.
2. Materials typically accepted by Certificate of Compliance shall not require inspection at the source unless specified in the Contract Documents. For a list of these items or materials, Contractor may refer to the Summary of Work.
3. Location changes to the source of materials requiring inspection without the required 24 - hour notification may result in non -compliant material subject to rejection. Contractor shall be responsible for staff charges resulting from last minute changes or cancellations once staff has been deployed. The Engineer shall issue a deductive Field Order for a minimum of 2 hours of staff time to reimburse the Agency for misdirected staff charges. The Contractor shall be notified in writing of the additional staff charges incurred.
4. Steel pipe in sizes larger than 18 inches shall require inspection at the source of production.
5. Vitrified clay and cast -iron pipe in all sizes are acceptable upon submittal of a Certificate of Compliance, subject to sampling and testing by the Agency.
6. Agency staff or a qualified inspection agency approved by the Engineer shall witness all welding, lining, coating, and testing. Contractor shall incur additional inspection costs outlined in 4-2.3, “Inspection of Items Not Locally Produced.”
7. All parts of production (including but not limited to product fabrication, welding, testing, lining, and coating of straight pieces and specials) shall be performed or produced in the United States.
8. Welding and all testing shall be performed by certified welders and testing staff with credentials traceable in the United States.
9. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer free and safe access to any and all parts of Work at any time. Such free and safe access shall include means of safe access and egress, ventilation, lighting, shoring, dewatering and all elements pertaining to the safety of persons as contained in the California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Industrial Relations, Chapter 4, Division of Industrial Safety, Subchapter 4, Construction Safety Orders and such other safety regulations as may apply. Contractor shall furnish Engineer with such information as may be necessary to keep the Engineer fully informed regarding progress and manner of work and character of materials. Inspection or testing of the whole or any portion of the Work or materials incorporated in the Work sh all not relieve Contractor from any obligation to fulfill this Contract.
4-2.3 Inspection of Items Not Locally Produced
ADD the following:
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
1. The Engineer may elect Agency staff or Consultants to perform inspection of an out-of-town manufacturers. The Contractor shall incur additional inspection costs of the Engineer including lodging, meals, and incidental expenses based on Federal Per Diem Rates, along with travel and car rental expenses. If the manufacturing plant operates a double shift, a double shift shall be figured in the inspection costs.
a. At the option of the Engineer, full time inspection shall continue for the length of the manufacturing period. If the manufacturing period will exceed 3 consecutive weeks, Contractor shall incur additional inspection expenses of the Engineer’s supervisor for a trip of 2 Working Days to the site per month.
b. When the Engineer elects Agency staff or Consultant s to perform out -of-town inspections, the wages of staff employed by the Agency shall not be part of the additional inspection expenses paid by Contractor.
c. Federal Per Diem Rates can be determined at the location below:
https://www.gsa.gov/portal/content/104877
2. Specialty Testing of Foreign Materials.
a. Materials that are manufactured, produced, or fabricated outside of the United States shall be delivered to a distribution point in California, unless otherwise specified.
Quality Control and related testing shall be performed to all applicable specified U S standards. Manufacturer’s testing and staff certification shall be traceable to a United States regulatory agency. Retain the materials for a sufficient period of time to permit inspection, sampling, and testing. The Contractor shall not be entitled to an extension of time for acts or events occurring outside of, at point of entry, or during transport to the United States, unless the extension is acceptable to the Engineer.
ADD 4-2.4 Specialty Inspection Paid for by the Contractor
1. Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of a qualified inspection agency to perform specialty inspection services as required by the Contract Documents.
2. The payment for the specialty inspection service Work shall be included under the Bid item for “Specialty Inspection Paid For By the Contractor.”
3. When an Allowance Bid item for “Specialty Testing Under the Direction of the Engineer” is provided, Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of a qualified third party independent laboratory to perform the required testing. Contractor shall be reim bursed for the cost of testing under this Bid item.
4. Contractor shall be reimbursed for the cost of specialty inspections when an Allowance Bid item is included in the Bid otherwise the cost is the responsibility of the Contractor if the manufacturer requires a specialty inspection service.
4-3 TESTING
ADD the following:
1. Except as specified in these Special Provisions, the Agency will bear the cost of testing of locally produced materials and/or on-site workmanship where the results of such tests meet or exceed the requirements indicated in the Standard Specifications, Technical Specification, and any Supplemental Provisions. The cost of all other tests shall be borne by the Contractor.
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
2. At the option of the Engineer, the source of supply of each of the materials shall be approved by the Engineer before the delivery is started. All materials proposed for use may be inspected or tested at any time during their preparation and use. If, after incorporating such materials into the Work, it is found that sources of supply that have been approved do not furnish a uniform product, or if the product from any source proves unacceptable at any time, the Contractor shall furnish approved material from other approved sources. If any product proves unacceptable after improper storage, handling or for any other reason it shall be rejected, not incorporated into the Work and shall be removed from the Project Site all at the Contractor’s expense.
3. Compaction tests may be made by the Engineer and all costs for tests that meet or exceed the requirements of the specifications shall be borne by the Agency. The tests may be made at any place along the Work as deemed necessary by the Engineer. The costs of any retests made necessary by noncompliance with the specifications shall be borne by the Contractor. 4-4 TRADE NAMES
ADD the following:
1. Whenever materials or equipment are indicated in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular supplier, the naming of the item is intended to establish the type, function, and quality required.
2. Unless stated otherwise, materials or equipment of other suppliers may be accepted if sufficient information is submitted to the Engineer for review to determine whether the material or equipment proposed is equivalent or equal to that named.
3. For reviews prior to Bid:
a. The Engineer shall respond to Contractor’s substitution proposal by the last date for issuing an Addendum for the Contract. If the Engineer fails to respond to Contractor’s substitution proposal before the Bid due date, the substitution proposal shall be deemed denied.
b. Contractor may bring forward a substitution proposal after Award that was denied based on the Engineer’s failure to respond by submitting a Cost Reduction Proposal in accordance with 2-6.1, “Cost Reduction Proposal.”
4. Include the following information in the request for substitution:
a. Whether or not acceptance of the substitute for use in the Work shall require a change in any of the Contract Documents to adopt the design to the proposed substitute. b. Whether or not incorporation or use of the substitute in connection with the Work is subject to the payment of any license fee or royalty.
c. All variations of the proposed substitute from the items originally specified shall be identified.
d. Available maintenance, repair, and replacement service requirements. The manufacturer shall have a local service agency within 50 miles (80.5 km) of the Site which maintains properly trained personnel and adequate spare parts and is able to respond and complete repairs within 24 hours.
e. Certifications from the manufacturer or service provider that the proposed substitute shall perform the intended function adequately under the expected service
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
conditions, achieve the results called for by the general design, and be similar and of equal substance to that indicated.
5. There is no guaranteed time frame for the Engineer’s review of the substitution requests. Any lack of action on the Engineer’s side within Contractor’s requested time does not constitute acceptance of the substitution.
6. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, substitute items are determined to be unsatisfactory in performance, appearance, durability, compatibility with existing equipment or systems, availability of repair parts and suitability of application, the Contractor s hall remove the substituted item and replace it with the originally specified item at no cost to the Agency.
7. The burden of proof as to the type, function, and quality of any such substitute product, material or equipment shall be upon Contractor. The Engineer may require at Contractor’s expense additional data about the proposed substitute.
8. Acceptance by the Engineer of a substitute item does not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents. If the Engineer takes no exceptions to the proposed substitution, it shall not relieve Contractor from Contra ctor’s responsibility to the efficiency, sufficiency, quality, and performance of the substitute material or equipment in the same manner and degree as the material and equipment specified by name.
9. The Bid submittal shall be based on the material and equipment specified by name in the Contract. If the proposal is rejected by the Engineer, Contractor shall not be entitled to either an extension in Contract Time, an increase in the Contract Price, or both.
10. As applicable, no Shop Drawing or Working Drawing submittals shall be made for a substitute item nor shall any substitute item be ordered, installed, or utilized without the Engineer’s prior written approval.
11. The Contractor is responsible for the satisfactory performance of substituted items. If, in the sole opinion of the Engineer, the substitution is determined to be unsatisfactory in performance, appearance, durability, compatibility with associated items, a vailability of repair parts and suitability of application the Contractor shall remove the substituted item and replace it with the originally specified item at no cost to the Agency. 4-5 WEIGHING AND METERING EQUIPMENT
REPLACE the first paragraph with the following:
All scales and metering equipment used for proportioning materials shall be inspected for accuracy and certified within the past 12 months by the State of California Bureau of Weights and Measures, by the County Director or Sealer of Weights and Measures, or by a scale mechanic registered with or licensed by the County.
SECTION 5 – LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES
5-1 LAWS AND REGULATIONS
ADD the following:
1. The Contractor shall strictly adhere to the provisions of the Labor Code regarding minimum wages; the 8-hour day and 40-hour week; overtime; Saturday, Sunday, and holiday work; and
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
prohibitions against discrimination, harassment, and retaliation. The Contractor shall forfeit to the Agency the penalties prescribed in the Labor Code for violations.
2. Each worker shall be paid subsistence and travel as required by the collective bargaining agreement on file with the State of California Department of Industrial Relations.
3. The Contractor’s attention is directed to Labor Code Section 1776 which imposes responsibility upon the Contractor for the maintenance, certification, and availability for inspection of such records for all persons employed by the Contractor or Subcontractor in connection with the Project. The Contractor shall agree through the Contract to comply with this Section and the remaining provisions of the Labor Code.
4. Municipal ordinances that affect this Work include Chapter 11.06. Excavation and Grading. If this notice specifies locations or possible materials, such as borrow pits or gravel beds, for use in the proposed construction Project which would be subject to Fish and Game Code Section 1601 or 1603, the conditions established in Fish and Game Code Section 1601 et seq. shall become conditions of the Contract.
5-3.3 Payroll Records.
ADD the following:
1. The Contractor and its Subcontractors shall maintain and furnish to the Agency, at a designated time, a certified copy of each weekly payroll reflecting the wages containing all of Contractor’s and Subcontractors’ employees engaged in the Work and a statement of compliance signed under penalty of perjury.
5-3.4 Hours of Labor
ADD the following:
1. Unless otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer, the hours of work shall be between the hours of 7:00 AM and 4:00 PM on Mondays through Fridays, excluding Agency holidays.
The Contractor shall obtain the written approval of the Engineer if the Contractor desires to work outside these hours or at any time during weekends and/or holidays. This written permission must be obtained at least 48 hours prior to such work. The Engineer may approve work outside the stated hours and/or days when, in his/her sole opinion, such work conducted by the Contractor is beneficial to the best interests of the Agency. The Contractor shall pay the inspection costs of such work.
2. The Contractor shall incorporate the dates, areas and types of work prohibited in this section in the Construction Schedule. No additional payment, adjustment of bid prices or adjustment of contract time of completion will be allowed as a consequence of th e prohibition of work being performed within the dates, areas and/or types of work prohibited in this section. 5-4 INSURANCE
5-4.1 General.
ADD the following:
1. Contractor shall procure and maintain for the duration of the Contract insurance against claims for injuries to persons or damage to property which may arise from or in connection
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
with the performance of the Work by the Contractor, his or her agents, representatives, employees or Subcontractors. The insurance shall meet the City’s policy for insurance as stated in City Council Policy No. 70.
a. Coverages and Limits: Contractor shall maintain the types of coverages and minimum limits specified in these Agency Supplemental General Provisions (00 73 00):
i. Commercial General Liability (CGL) Insurance : Insurance written on an “occurrence” basis, including products -completed operations, personal & advertising injury, with limits no less than $2,000,000 per occurrence. If a general aggregate limit applies, either the general aggregate limit shall apply separately to this project/location or the general aggregate limit shall be twice the required occurrence limit.
ii. Business Automobile Liability Insurance : $2,000,000 combined single limit per accident for bodily injury and property damage. In addition, the auto policy must cover any vehicle used in the performance of the Contract, used onsite or offsite, whether owned, non -owned or hired, and whether sched uled or non-scheduled.
iii. Workers’ Compensation and Employers’ Liability Insurance : Workers’ compensation limits as required by the Labor Code and Employers’ Liability limits of $1,000,000 per incident. Workers’ compensation offered by the State Compensation Insurance Fund is acceptable to the City.
b. Additional Provisions: Contractor shall ensure that the policies of insurance required under this Contract with the exception of Workers’ Compensation and Business Automobile Liability Insurance contain, or are endorsed to contain, the following provisions.
i. The Agency, its officials, employees and volunteers must be covered as additional insured as respects: liability arising out of activities performed by or on behalf of the Contractor; products and completed operations of the Contractor; premises owned, leased, hired or borrowed by the Contractor. The coverage shall contain no special limitations on the scope of protection afforded to the Agency, its officials, employees or volunteers. All additional insured endorsements must be evidenced using separate documents attached to the certificate of insurance; 1 for each company affording general liability, and employers’ liability coverage.
ii. The Contractor’s insurance coverage shall be primary insurance as respects the Agency, its officials, employees and volunteers. Any insurance or self - insurance maintained by the Agency, its officials, employees or volunteers shall be in excess of the Contr actor's insurance and shall not contribute with it.
iii. Any failure to comply with reporting provisions of the policies shall not affect coverage provided to the Agency, its officials, employees or volunteers. iv. Coverage shall state that the Contractor’s insurance shall apply separately to each insured against whom claim is made or suit is brought, except with respect to the limits of the insurer’s liability.
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
c. Notice of Cancellation. Each insurance policy required by this Contract shall be endorsed to state that coverage shall not be nonrenewed, suspended, voided, canceled, or reduced in coverage or limits except after 10 Calendar Days’ prior written notice has been sent to the Agency by certified mail, return receipt requested. d. Deductibles and Self -Insured Retention (S.I.R.) Levels. Any deductibles or self - insured retention levels must be declared to and approved by the Agency. At the option of the Agency, either: the insurer shall reduce or eliminate such deductibles or self-insured retention levels as respects the Agency, its officials and employees; or the Contractor shall procure a bond guaranteeing payment of losses and related investigation, claim administration and defense expenses. e. Waiver of Subrogation. All policies of insurance required under this Contract shall contain a waiver of all rights of subrogation the insurer may have or may acquire against the Agency or any of its officials or employees. f. Subcontractors. Contractor shall include all Subcontractors as insured under its policies or shall furnish separate certificates and endorsements for each Subcontractor. Coverages for Subcontractors shall be subject to all of the requirements stated in these Agency Supplemental General Provisions (00 73 00). g. Acceptability of Insurers. Insurance must be placed with insurers that have a rating in Best’s Key Rating Guide of at least A -:VII. Insurers must also be authorized to transact the business of insurance by the State of California Insurance Commissioner as admitted carriers as eviden ced by a listing in the official publication of the Department of Insurance of the State of California and/or under the standards specified by City Council Policy No. 70.
h. Verification of Coverage. Contractor shall furnish the Agency with certificates of insurance and original endorsements affecting coverage required by this clause. The certificates and endorsements for each insurance policy are to be signed by a person authorized by that insurer to bind coverage on its behalf. The certificates and endorsements are to be in forms approved by the Agency and are to be received and approved by the Agency before the Contract is executed by the Agency. i. Coverage and Limits . Contractor will maintain the types of coverage and minimum limits indicated below unless the Risk Manager or City Manager or Executive Manager approves a lower amount. These minimum amounts of coverage will not constitute any limitations or cap on Contractor’s indemnification obligations under this Contract.
Agency, its officers, agents, and employees make no representation that the limits of the insurance specified to be carried by Contractor pursuant to this Contract are adequate to protect Contractor. If Contractor believes that any required insurance coverage is inadequate, Contractor will obtain such additional insurance coverage, as Contractor deems adequate, at Contractor’s sole expense. The full limits available to the named insured shall also be a vailable and applicable to the Agency as an additional insured.
j. Cost of Insurance. The Cost of all insurance required under this Contract shall be included in the Contractor’s Bid.
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
5-6 PATENTS FEES AND ROYALTIES.
DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:
1. Contractor shall pay, at no additional cost to the Agency, all applicable royalties and license fees arising from the Work. Contractor shall indemnify and defend all claims and lawsuits for infringement of patent, trademark, and copyright against the Agenc y and shall hold the Agency harmless from any loss.
5-7 SAFETY
5-7.1.1 General.
ADD the following:
1. When conducting grading or excavation, place Contractor’s name and emergency telephone number adjacent to the Work at intervals and locations approved by the Engineer. The method of posting shall be approved by the Engineer.
2. The Contractor shall respond and initiate corrective action in accordance with OSHA and within 24 hours of the notice of the nonconforming Work that poses an imminent threat to person or property.
3. The Contractor shall erect and properly maintain at all times, as required by the conditions and progress of the Work, all necessary safeguards for the protection of workers and public, and shall use danger signs warning against hazards created by such fea tures of construction as protruding nails, hoists, well holes, and falling materials.
ADD: 5-7.1.3 Health and Safety Plan (HSP).
1. The Contractor is ultimately responsible for the health and safety of Contractor’s employees.
These specifications shall not be construed to limit Contractor’s liability nor to assume that the Agency, its employees, or designees shall assume any of Contractor’s liability associated with Site safety considerations.
2. Contractor shall have a HSP in effect at least 1 week prior to the commencement of the Work.
The HSP shall comply with all OSHA and other applicable requirements.
3. The HSP shall specifically address procedures and protocols that shall be followed to monitor for or respond to the presence of hazardous atmosphere, possibility for engulfment, gasses due to organic soils or proximity to landfills, exposure to hazardous products such as may be released when grinding, cutting, or torching galvanized or painted surfaces or asbestos containing materials, contaminated soil, and groundwater. Identify response actions that shall be taken when these conditions are encountered.
4. The Agency shall not assume any role in determining the adequacy of the HSP on Contractor’s behalf.
5-7.3 Use of Explosives.
ADD the following:
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
1. Explosives may be used only when authorized in writing by the Engineer. The Contractor shall prepare and submit an application for blasting permit to the City of Carlsbad Engineering Department and comply with the City’s blasting policy.
5-7.7 Security and Protective Devices.
5-7.7.1 General.
DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:
1. Security and protective devices shall consist of fencing, railing, steel plates, or other devices for the protection of workers or the public from hazards posed by open excavations or any work in progress. Security and protective devices shall remain in place until the Work is accepted.
2. Unless otherwise specified, no separate or additional payment will be made for security and protective devices. Payment shall be included in the Contract price for the various Bid items requiring such devices.
ADD: 5-7.7.3 Playground Safety. Not Used
5-7.7.2 Security Fencing
1. The payment for security fencing Work for open excavations shall be included in the Contract Price.
5-7.8 Steel Plate Covers
5-7.8.1 General.
ADD the following:
1. The Contractor shall protect transverse or longitudinal cuts, voids, trenches, holes, and excavations in the right-of-way that cannot be properly completed within 1 Working Day by adequately designed barricades and structural steel plates (plates) that shall support legal vehicle loads in such a way as to preserve unobstructed traffic flow.
2. For trench widths exceeding those in Table 5-7.8.2, a structural design shall be prepared by a California registered civil or structural engineer regularly engaged in the design of shoring systems.
3. The Contractor shall secure approval in advance from authorities concerning the use of any bridging proposed on the Work.
4. The Contractor shall shore the trench adequately to support the bridging and traffic loads.
5. The Contractor shall design plates for HS 20 -44 truck loading in accordance with Caltrans Bridge Design Specifications Manual and evaluate soil conditions and ensure that the plate extends enough beyond the trench walls to support traffic loads.
6. The Contractor shall use the plates skid -resistant with a nominal COF of 0.35 as determined by California Test Method 342. If a different test method is used, the Contractor may utilize standard test plates with known coefficients of friction available fro m each Caltrans District Materials Engineer to correlate skid resistance results to California Test Method 342.
7. Plates shall provide complete coverage to prevent any person, bicycle, motorcycle, or motor vehicle from being endangered due to plate movement causing separations or gaps.
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
8. Alternative installation methods may be submitted in accordance with 3 -8, “SUBMITTALS” for the Engineer’s approval.
9. Contractor shall install signage and postings with a 2 inch (50.8 mm) minimum letter height indicating the steel plate cover load limit, the Company’s name, and a 24 -hour emergency contact phone number. See 601-1, “GENERAL.”
10. Contractor is responsible for the maintenance of the plates, shoring, and asphalt concrete ramps or any other approved device used to secure the plates. Contractor shall immediately mobilize necessary personnel and equipment after being notified by the Eng ineer, the Agency, or a member of the public of a repair needed for such items as plate movements, noise, anchors, and asphalt ramps. Failure to respond to the emergency request within 2 hours shall be grounds for the Agency to perform necessary repairs th at shall be invoiced at the actual cost including overhead or $500 per incident, whichever is greater. Failure may also result in a “Stop Work” notice.
11. When plates are removed, Contractor shall repair any damage to the pavement with fine graded asphalt concrete mix or slurry seal satisfactory to the Engineer.
12. The pavement shall be cold planed to a depth equal to the thickness of the plate and to a width and length equal to the dimensions of the plate. The cold milling shall produce a flat surface that the plate shall rest on with no horizontal or vertical movem ent. Horizontal gaps between the unmilled pavement and the plate shall not exceed 25 mm (1 ") and shall be filled with elastomeric sealant material which may, at the contractor's option, be mixed with no more that 50%, by volume, of Type I aggregate conforming to the requirements of tables 203-
5.2 and 203-5.3.
ADD 5-8 INDEMNIFICATION AND HOLD HARMLESS AGREEMENT
1. Contractor agrees to defend, indemnify, and hold harmless Agency, its affiliated and subsidiary entities, and its elected and appointed officials, officers, directors, managers, employees and agents (“Indemnified Parties”) from and against all claims asserted, liability established, or judgments for damages or injuries to any person or property, including to Contractor’s officers, employees, agents, or subcontractors, arising directly or indirectly out of the Work, which arise from, are connected with, or are caused or claimed to be caused by the acts or omissions of Contractor, its officers, employees, agents or subcontractors.
Contractor’s duty to defend, indemnify, and hold harmless shall not include any claims or liabilities arising from the sole negligence or sole willful misconduct of the Indemnified Parties.
Contractor further agrees that its duty to defend includes all attorney fees and costs associated with enforcement of this indemnification provision, defense of any claims arising from this Contract, and, where a conflict of interest exists or may exist between Contractor and Agency, the reasonable value of attorney fees and costs if Agency chooses, at its own election, to conduct its own defense or participate in its own defense of any claim related to this Contract.
2. Contractor shall also defend and indemnify the Indemnified Parties against any challenges to the Award of the Contract to Contractor, and Contractor will pay all costs, including defense
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
costs for the Agency. Defense costs include the cost of separate counsel for the Indemnified Parties, if the Indemnified Parties request separate counsel.
3. Contractor shall also defend and indemnify the Indemnified Parties against any challenges to the Award of the Contract to Contractor, arising in whole or in part from alleged inaccuracies or misrepresentation by the Contractor, whether intentional or otherwise, and Contractor will pay all costs, including defense costs f or the Agency. Defense costs include the cost of separate counsel for the Indemnified Parties , if the Indemnified Parties request separate counsel.
4. Contractor shall defend, indemnify, protect and hold the Indemnified Parties harmless from and against any dispute between Contractor and Contractor’s Subcontractors if the Indemnified Parties are made a party to any judicial or administrative proceeding.
ADD 5-9 CONFLICT OF INTEREST
1. Establish and make known to Contractor’s employees appropriate safeguards to prohibit employees from using their positions for a purpose that is or gives the appearance of being motivated by desire for private gain for themselves or others and particularly those with whom they have family, business, or other relationships. Project personnel shall not accept gratuities or any other favors from Subcontractors or potential Subcontractors.
2. Contractor is subject to all federal, state, and local conflict of interest laws, regulations, and policies applicable to public contracts and procurement practices (Government Code Sections 1090 et. seq. and 81000 et. seq., the Agency’s Ordinances, and the City of Carlsbad Municipal Code). If, in performing the Work, Contractor make s or participate s in a “governmental decision” in accordance with Title 2, Section 18701, subdivision (a)(2) of the California Code of Regulations, or perform s the same or substantially all the same duties for Agency that would otherwise be performed by an Agency employee holding a position specified in the Agency’s conflict of interest code, Contractor shall be subject to a conflict of interest code requiring the completion of 1 or more statements of economic interests disclosing Contractor’s relevant financial interests.
3. Statements of economic interests shall be made on Fair Political Practices Commission Form 700 and filed with the City of Carlsbad’s City Clerk. Contractor shall file a Form 700 (Assuming Office Statement) within 30 Calendar Days of the Agency’s written determination that Contractor shall be subject to a conflict of interest code and file a Form 700 (Annual Statement) on or before April 1st disclosing any financial interests held during the previous calendar year for which Contractor was subject to a conflict of interest code.
4. If the Agency requires Contractor to file a statement of economic interests as a result of the Work performed, Contractor shall be considered a n “Agency Official” for conflict of interest purposes, including the prohibition against lobbying the Agency for 1 year following the expiration or termination of the Contract.
5. Contractor’s personnel employed on the Project shall not accept gratuities or any other favors from any Subcontractors or potential Subcontractors. Contractor shall not recommend or specify any product, supplier, or other Contractor with whom Contractor has a direct or indirect financial or organizational interest or relationship that would violate conflict of interest laws, regulations, or policies.
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
6. If Contractor violates any conflict of interest laws or any of these conflict of interest provisions, the violation shall be grounds for immediate termination of this Contract. Further, the violation subjects Contractor to liability to the Agency for all damages sustained as a result of the violation.
ADD the following: 5-10 ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION
1. When specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall post all communications addressed to the Engineer concerning construction including RFIs, submittals, daily logs, and transmittals to the Project management website established for the Project. The Contractor shall maintain a list of scheduled activities including planned and actual execution dates for all major construction activities and milestones defined in the approved Schedule. The Contractor shall review and act on all communications addressed to the Contractor in the Project management website. A user’s guide to the Project management system may be available on the City’s website and shall be provided to Contractor at the Pre -construction Meeting.
2. The payment for electronic communications shall be included in the Contract Price.
ADD the following: 5-11 STATUTORY REFERENCES
1. All references in these Agency Supplemental General Provisions (00 73 00) to any statute, rule or regulation are to the statute, rule or regulation as amended, modified, supplemented, or replaced from time to time by the corresponding legislative or regulatory body.
SECTION 6 – PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK
6-1 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK ADD the following:
1. A Payment for the Construction Schedule shall be included in the Contract Price and no separate payment will be made, therefore.
6-2 PROSECUTION OF WORK
ADD the following:
1. As soon as possible under the provisions of the Specifications, the Contractor shall backfill all excavations and restores to usefulness all improvements existing prior to the start of the Work.
2. When a Subcontractor fails to prosecute a portion of the Work in a manner satisfactory to the Agency, Contractor shall remove such Subcontractor immediately upon written request of the Agency, and shall request approval of a replacement Subcontractor to perform the Work in accordance with the Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act (Pub. Contract Code, § 4100 et seq.) at no added cost to the Agency.
ADD the following: 6-2.1 Order of Work.
1. The Contractor shall incorporate the requirements of the city, utility companies or agencies having jurisdiction over the Work in accordance with 2 -4 Cooperation and Collateral Work, including any phasing requirements identified on the Plans or Special Provisions.
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
2. If construction and demolition operations are within an active public space, the Contractor shall submit a phasing plan to the Engineer to accommodate accessibility to the public and Agency staff. Phasing plan must be approved before Work starts. Phasing plan will be considered part of the mobilization Bid item and shall include any revisions or implementation of the Plan.
ADD the following: 6-2.2 Moratoriums.
1. When moratorium periods are specified in the Special Provisions, Contractor shall stop Work and completely demobilize all construction related activity, equipment, and materials within the stated limits prior to the beginning of the moratorium periods at no additional cost to the Agency. The Contractor shall complete any Work that has been started prior to the start of the moratorium.
2. Contractor shall restore and clean the Site prior to each moratorium. The Contractor shall not leave equipment, materials, or traffic control on the Site during the moratorium periods.
Trenches shall be backfilled during moratorium periods. Temporary resurfacing or steel plate covers over trenches shall not be used.
3. The payment for complying with moratorium requirements shall be included in the Contract Bid. Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional costs for repeated mobilization and demobilization to continue the Work after the moratorium periods. 6-3 TIME OF COMPLETION
6-3.1 General.
ADD the following:
1. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract, the time of completion of the Contract shall be expressed in Working Days.
2. The number of Working Days specified for the walk-through, preparation, and the completion of Punchlist items until acceptance shall be included in the stipulated Contract Time.
3. For pipeline Projects, the following shall be included in the stipulated Contract Time:
a. Complete each street segment within 15 Working Days from the day the slurry seal or asphalt overlay is placed. Each completed segment shall include other incidental Work items (weed abatement, damaged asphalt pavement replacement, asphalt patching, resurfacing, striping, markings, raised pavement markers, and inlet markers). b. Where shutdowns of 16 -inch and larger pipes are required, there is a shutdown moratorium from May until October. The Contractor shall plan and schedule Work accordingly. No additional payment or Working Days will be granted for delays due to the moratorium.
4. When specified in the Contract Documents, the PEP is included in the stipulated Contract Time and shall begin with the acceptance of the installation of the vegetation plan in accordance with Part 8 – LANDSCAPING AND IRRIGATION.
5. The Contractor shall obtain the written approval of the Engineer to perform any Work outside of normal Work hours. This approval must be obtained at least 48 hours prior to commencement of such Work. The Contractor shall pay any additional costs for inspection or testing of such Work.
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
6. Work that is required by the Engineer to occur outside of normal Work hours will be identified in the Special Provisions.
7. The Contractor shall not perform Work during moratoriums per 6 -2.2 or during any periods of restriction identified in agency permits or Project environmental documents and shall include all such schedule constraints in the Construction Schedule.
8. No additional payment or adjustment of Bid item prices or adjustment of Contract Time will be made for the Contractor’s inability to work outside of normal Work hours if Contractor’s request is denied by the Engineer or during prohibited periods.
9. Contractor’s schedule shall plan for a minimum of 2 weeks after final walk-through to receive a final punch list from the Agency. Punch list items can be worked on during this 2-week period.
6-4 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME
6-4.1 General.
ADD the following:
1. The Agency shall only grant an extension of time if the Extra Work or unforeseen condition impacts the Project’s critical path. All requests for an extension in Contract Time for any Extra Work or unforeseen event shall be demonstrated by using the CPM. No other scheduling method shall be used to calculate the Project’s schedule. 6-4.2 Extensions of Time.
DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:
1. The Contract Time shall be modified only by Change Order.
2. Contractor shall immediately submit to the Agency a written request for a Change Order to modify the Contract Time, but in no event later than 1 Working Day after the occurrence and discovery of the events giving rise to the request. Contractor shall include in Contractor’s request a general description of the basis for and the estimated length of any extension and submit supporting data, includin g a time impact analysis setting forth the claimed Critical Path impacts to the Construction Schedule consistent with Section 1.14 (Change Orders, Delays, and Extensions of Time).
3. The Engineer shall not grant an extension of Contract Time unless Contractor demonstrates, through an analysis of the critical path, the following:
a. The event causing the delay impacted the activities along the Project’s critical path. b. The increases in the time to perform all or part of the Project beyond the Contract Time arose from unforeseeable causes beyond Contractor’s control and without Contractor’s fault or negligence.
c. All Project float has been used.
4. The Engineer shall issue a weekly document that stipulates the Contract Time. If Contractor does not agree with this document, Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review a written protest supporting Contractor’s objections to the document within 15 Working Days after receipt of the weekly document. Contractor’s failure to file a timely protest shall constitute Contractor’s acceptance of the Engineer’s weekly document.
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
a. Contractor’s protest will be considered a claim for time extension and shall be subject to 2-10.1, “Claims.”
6-4.4 Written Notice and Report.
DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:
1. Contractor’s failure to file with the Engineer a written request and report of cause within 24 hours will be considered grounds for refusal by the Agency to consider such request.
2. The Contractor shall provide written notice to the Engineer within 2 hours after the beginning of the delay, or when the Contractor has placed any workers or equipment on standby for any reason that the Contractor has determined to be caused by the Agency or by any organization that the Agency may otherwise be obligated by. The Contractor shall provide continuing daily written notice to the Engineer, each Working Day, throughout the duration of such period of delay. The initial and continuing written notices shall include the classification of each worker and supervisor and the make and model of all equipment placed on standby, the cumulative duration of the standby, the Contractor’s opinion of the cause of the delay and a cogent explanation of why the Contractor could not avoid the delay by reasonable means. Should the Contractor fail to provide the notice(s) required by this section the Contractor agrees that no delay has occurred and that it will not submit any claim(s) therefore.
3. The request for payment or extension must be made at least 15 Calendar Days prior to the specified completion date. Failure by the Contractor to provide notices and reports as specified in the Contract will be considered grounds for refusal by the Agency to consider such request.
6-6 SUSPENSION OF THE WORK
6-6.1 General.
ADD the following:
1. The Agency reserves the right to shut down any trenching operation if Contractor is not proceeding within a reasonable period of time to restore the pavement and Site cleanup. A reasonable period of time is considered to be 5 to 10 Working Days after backf illing any 1 block, approximately 600 feet, of pipeline. The Engineer shall determine the period of time allowed which shall not be subject to dispute.
2. During periods when the Work is suspended, Contractor shall be prepared for any emergency Work that shall be supervised by Contractor’s representative.
3. Trenching operations are subject to suspension if the Contractor does not comply with the requirements for the maximum length of open trench specified in 306-3.5. 6-7 TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT FOR DEFAULT
6-7.1 General.
DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:
1. Prior to the Acceptance of the Work, Contractor shall be found in default of the Contract if:
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
a. Contractor becomes insolvent, assign Contractor’s assets for the benefit of Contractor’s creditors, are unable to pay Contractor’s debts as they become due, or are otherwise financially unable to complete the Work.
b. Contractor abandon s the Work by failing to report to the Site and by failing to diligently execute the Work to completion.
c. Contractor disregards written instruction from the Engineer or materially violates provisions of the Contract Documents.
d. Contractor fails to execute the Work according to the Schedule approved by the Engineer.
e. Contractor disregards laws or regulations of any public body having jurisdiction. f. Contractor commits continuous or repeated violations of regulatory or statutory safety requirements.
g. Contractor fails to notify the Engineer upon discovery of items of Native American, Archaeological, or Paleontological interests.
2. Notices and other written communications regarding default between the Contractor, the Agency, and the Surety shall be transmitted in accordance with 5- 2, “SPECIAL NOTICES.” 6-8 TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONVENIENCE.
DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:
1. At any time, the Agency may at its sole discretion terminate this Contract in whole or in part.
If the Agency decides to terminate this Contract for convenience, the Agency shall issue a written notice of termination for convenience in accordance with 5 -2, “SPECIAL NOTICES.” Upon receipt of this notice, Contractor shall immediately proceed as follows:
a. Stop Work immediately or in accordance with the Notice of Termination. b. Notify Subcontractors and Suppliers to immediately cease their Work and place no further subcontracts for materials, services, or facilities except as necessary to complete any authorized continued portion of the Contract. c. Terminate all subcontracts to the extent that they relate to the Work terminated. d. With approval by the Engineer, settle all outstanding obligations arising from the termination of subcontracts. This approval shall be final for the purposes of this section.
e. As directed by the Engineer, transfer and deliver completed or partially completed drawings, plans, calculations, specifications, and any other documents and records that, if the Contract had been completed, would be required to be furnished to the Agency.
f. Complete the performance of the Work not terminated. g. Take all necessary steps and actions to minimize all costs to the Agency as a result of the termination.
h. Take any action that may be necessary or that the Engineer may direct for the protection and preservation of the property related to the Contract that is in Contractor’s possession and in which the Agency has or may acquire an interest.
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
6-8.1 Termination Cost.
1. The Agency shall determine and pay Contractor the fair and reasonable amounts for Contractor’s termination cost as follows:
a. The Contract Price for completed services accepted by the Engineer not previously paid or adjusted for any saving of freight and other charges. b. The fair and reasonable cost of settling and paying termination settlements for terminated subcontracts that are chargeable to the terminated portion of the Contract.
c. The Agency shall pay Contractor a prorated amount of profit for Work that Contractor performed. The Agency shall not pay for lost profit on Work that was not performed by Contractor.
6-8.2 Termination Settlement.
1. After termination, Contractor shall submit a final termination settlement proposal to the Engineer no later than 3 months from the effective date of termination, unless extended in writing by the Engineer.
2. If Contractor fails to submit the proposal within the time allowed, the Agency may determine and pay the fair and reasonable amount that may be due Contractor as a result of the termination. If Contractor does not agree that the amount determined by the Engineer is fair and reasonable, Contractor must notify the Engineer within 30 Calendar Days of receipt of payment.
6-8.3 Determination of Amount Due the Contractor.
1. In determining the amount due Contractor, the Agency shall deduct the following:
a. The fair value of property destroyed, lost, stolen, or damaged that has become undeliverable to the Agency.
b. Any claim which the Agency has against Contractor under the Contract. 6-8.4 Records and Documents Relating to Termination.
1. The Engineer will file an Agreement of Mutual Rescission of Contract with the Board. Once the Agreement is executed and a Notice of Completion is recorded, retention can be released.
2. Unless otherwise specified or required by statute, Contractor shall maintain all records and documents relating to the terminated portion of the Contract for 3 years after final settlement. This includes all books and other evidence bearing on Contractor’s costs, expenses, and settlement under the Contract. Contractor shall make these records and documents available to the Agency, at Contractor’s office, at all reasonable times, without any direct charge. If approved by the Engineer, Contractor may maintain photographs, microphotographs, and other authentic reproductions instead of original records and documents.
6-8.5 The Agency’s Right to Terminate or Suspend for Loss of Project Funds.
1. The Agency may terminate or suspend the Contract at its sole discretion if the State of California or its agents render the funds being used to fund this Project unavailable. If the Agency chooses to suspend the Contract, that suspension shall last until f unds are identified and approved by the Board, whichever is appropriate, to be used to complete this Project. If
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
the Agency elects under this provision to terminate the Contract, then neither Party is entitled to compensation from the other Party for any costs arising from such termination.
The Agency may also elect to terminate after invoking a suspension under this provision. 6-9 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:
1. Contractor’s failure to complete the Work within the time allowed shall result in damages being sustained by the Agency. Such damages are, and shall continue to be, impracticable and extremely difficult to determine. For each consecutive Working Day in excess of the time specified for the completion of the Work, as adjusted in accordance with 6 -4, “DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME,” Contractor shall pay to the Agency, or have withheld from monies due it, the sum described in the table below, along with any oth er damages that may be sustained by the Agency during the Project, unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions.
2. The execution of the Contract shall constitute agreement between Contractor and the Agency that the liquidated damage amount described in the table below is the value of the damage caused by Contractor’s failure to complete the Work within the allotted time. Such sum shall not be construed as a penalty and may be deducted from Contractor’s payments if such delay occurs.
Contract Value Liquidated Damage Daily Amount
$100,000 and more $2,500
3. Any progress payments made to Contractor after the specified completion date shall not constitute a waiver of payment for damages sustained by the Agency under this section.
ADD the following: 6-10 RIGHT TO AUDIT
6-10.1 General.
1. The Agency retains the right to review, audit, reasonably access Contractor’s and all Contractor’s Subcontractor’s premises to review and audit Contractor’s compliance with the provisions of the Contract. This includes the right to inspect, photocopy, and retain copies, outside of Contractor’s premises, of all records with appropriate safeguards if such retention is deemed necessary by the Agency in its sole discretion. The Agency will keep this information in strictest confidence.
2. Contractor shall include the Agency’s right to audit in its subcontracts and ensure that these specifications are binding upon all Subcontractors.
6-10.2 Audit.
1. The right to audit includes the right to examine any and all books, records, documents, and any other evidence of procedures and practices that the Agency determines is necessary to discover and verify that Contractor are in compliance with all requirement s under the Contract.
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
2. If there is a claim for additional compensation or for changes in Work, the right to audit also includes the right to verify all direct and indirect costs which are claimed to have been incurred, anticipated to be incurred, or for which a claim for additio nal compensation or for changes in the Work have been submitted.
3. Contractor shall maintain complete and accurate records in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices in the construction industry. Contractor shall also make available to the Engineer for review and audit all Project -related accounting record s and documents and any other financial data. Upon the Engineer’s request, Contractor shall submit exact duplicates of originals of all requested records to the Engineer. 6-10.3 Compliance Required Before Mediation and Litigation.
1. As a condition precedent to proceeding with mandatory mediation and further litigation under 2 -10.2, “Dispute Resolution Process” Contractor shall comply with the audit specifications within 60 Calendar Days of the Engineer’s notice to review and audit compliance. See 5-2, “SPECIAL NOTICES.”
6-10.4 Access to Records on Federally Funded Projects.
1. Contractor shall retain all records, books, papers, and documents directly pertinent to the Contract for a minimum of 5 years after the Agency makes final payments and all other pending matters are closed and shall allow access to those records to the Agency, the Federal grantor agency, the Comptroller General of the United States, or any duly authorized representatives.
SECTION 7 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Units of Measurement. The system of measure for this contract shall be the U.S. Standard Measures.
7-2 LUMP SUM WORK
ADD the following: 7-2.1 Schedule of Values (SOV).
1. Submit a SOV for the lump sum Bid items of the Work to the Engineer for review and approval at the pre-construction meeting. The total value for the work described in the contract documents shall be shown in the SOV with category totals reflective of those values presented in Section 00 41 00 BID FORM, Bid Schedule A in the contract.
2. The SOV shall:
a. Subdivide the Work into its respective parts.
b. Include values for all items comprising the Work.
c. Serve as the basis for monthly progress payments.
3. The Engineer is the sole judge of acceptable numbers, details, and description of values established. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, a greater number of SOV items than proposed by Contractor is necessary, add the additional items identified by the Eng ineer. When requested by the Engineer, provide substantiating data in support of the SOV.
4. The Contractor shall incorporate the SOV into the cost loading function of the Schedule in accordance with 6 -1, “CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK.” Monthly progress payment amounts for Lump Sum items shall be determined from the monthly updates of the Schedule activities.
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
5. The Contractor shall develop the SOV independently but simultaneously with the development of the Schedule activities and logic. Incorporate phase funding impacts, if applicable, into the Schedule.
6. The Contractor shall break down the Work not specifically included in the Bid as necessary for establishment of cost and Schedule activity.
7. Following acceptance of the SOV, the Contractor shall incorporate the changes (if any) into the cost loading portion of the Schedule. Where coordination of the Schedule and the SOV requires changes made to 1 or both documents, the Contractor shall propose changes to the SOV and to the Schedule activities to satisfy the Schedule cost loading requirements.
8. The Contractor shall update and submit these listings in conjunction with the Schedule monthly submittals.
9. The Contractor shall incorporate issued Change Orders or Field Orders in the Schedule into the SOV as single units identified by the Change Order or Field Order number.
10. Changes to the Schedule which add activities not included in the original Schedule but included in the original Work (schedule omissions) shall have values assigned as accepted by the Engineer. Other activity values shall be reduced to provide equal value adjustment increases for added activities as accepted by the Engineer.
11. In the event that the Contractor and the Engineer agree to make adjustments to the original SOV because of inequities discovered in the original accepted SOV, increases and equal decreases to values for activities may be made.
12. The payment for the preparation of the SOV shall be included in the Contract Price. 7-3 PAYMENT
7-3.1 General.
To paragraph (8), DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:
If, within the time fixed by law, a properly executed notice to stop payment is filed with the Agency, due to the Contractor’s failure to pay for labor or materials used in the Work, all money plus 25 percent due for such labor or materials will be withheld from payment in accordance with applicable laws. At the expiration of 30 Calendar Days from the date of recording the NOC, the amount deducted from the final estimate and retained by the Agency shall be paid to Contractor except such amounts as are required by law to be withheld by properly executed and filed notices to stop payment.
ADD the following:
1. Unless specified otherwise, the Contract Price includes use, consumer, and other taxes mandated by applicable legal requirements. The Contract Price is not subject to adjustment for tax increases.
2. As provided in California Public Contract Code Section 7105, if the Contract is not financed by revenue bonds, Contractor is not responsible for the cost of repairing or restoring damage to the Project when damage was proximately caused by an Act of God, in excess of 5% of the Contract Price, if the following occur:
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
a. The damaged portion of the Project was built in accordance with the Contract requirements.
b. There are no insurance requirements in the Contract for the damages.
3. Guarantee periods shall not be affected by any payment but shall commence on the date of recordation of the Notice of Completion.
7-3.2 Partial and Final Payment.
To paragraph (5), DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:
Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 22300, Contractor shall have the option, at Contractor’s expense, to substitute for any money withheld by the Agency, securities equivalent to the amount being withheld. Securities eligible for such substitution are bank or savings and loans certificates of deposit or such securities which are eligible for investment pursuant to Government Code Section 16430. As to any such security or securities so substituted for monies withheld, Contractor shall be the beneficial owner of same and shall receive any accrued interest.
Such security shall, at Contractor’s request and expense, be deposited with the Agency or with a State or Federally Chartered bank as the escrow agent who shall pay such monies to Contractor upon notification by the Engineer that payment can be made. Such notification shall be given at the expiration of 30 Calendar Days from the date of NOC, or as prescribed by law, provided however, that there shall be a continued retention of the necessary securities to cover such amounts as are required by law to be withheld by properly executed and filed notices to stop payment, or as may be authorized by the Contract to be further retained.
ADD the following:
1. After final inspection, the Engineer will make a Final Payment Estimate and process a corresponding payment. This estimate will be in writing and shall be for the total amount owed the Contractor as determined by the Engineer and shall be itemized by the Contract Bid item and Change Order item with quantities and payment amounts and shall show all deductions made or to be made for prior payments and amounts to be deducted under provisions of the Contract. All prior estimates and progress payments shall be s ubject to correction in the Final Payment Estimate.
The Contractor shall have 30 Calendar Days from receipt of the Final Payment Estimate to make a written statement disputing any Bid item or Change Order item quantity or payment amount. The Contractor shall provide all documentation at the time of submitting the statement supporting its position. Should the Contractor fail to submit the statement and supporting documentation within the time specified, the Contractor acknowledges that full and final payment has been made for all Contract Bid items and Change Order items.
If the Contractor submits a written statement with supporting documents within 30 Calendar Days from receipt of the Final Payment Estimate, the Engineer will review the disputed item within 30 Calendar Days and make any appropriate adjustments on the Final Payment.
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
Remaining disputed quantities or amounts not approved by the Engineer will be subject to resolution as specified in Section 2-10.1.1, Initiation of Claim.
The written statement filed by the Contractor shall be in sufficient detail to enable the Engineer to ascertain the basis and amount of the disputed items. The Engineer will consider the merits of the Contractor’s claims. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish within a reasonable time such further information and details as may be required by the Engineer to determine the facts or contentions involved in its claims. Failure to submit such information and details will be sufficient cause for denying payment for the disputed items.
2. Final Payment and release of Retention shall be paid after Contractor submits the following:
a. An affidavit that payrolls and bills for materials, equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Agency or the Agency’s property might be responsible for or encumbered by. Fewer amounts withheld by the Agency shall have been paid for or otherwise satisfied.
b. A certificate evidencing that insurances required by the Contract Documents shall remain in force after Final Payment is currently in effect and shall not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least a 30 Calendar Days prior written notice has been given to the Engineer.
c. Consent of Surety to Final Payment.
d. If required by the Engineer, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims, and security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract Documents. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Agency, Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Engineer to indemnify the Agency against such lien. e. If required in the Contract Documents, the successful completion and submittal of the required reports such as construction demolition, waste recycling, and hydrostatic discharge reports.
f. Required documentation, record drawings, operations manuals, test reports, warranty documentation, and UL labels shall be submitted before requesting the release of retention.
ADD the following: 7-3.2.1 Application for Progress Payment.
1. By the 5th day of each month, sign, fill out, and submit to the Engineer a partial payment estimate that identifies acceptable Work performed during the previous month, or since the last partial payment estimate was submitted. If requested by the Engineer, provide such additional data as may be required to support the payment estimate. Such data may include submission o f signed field orders and satisfactory evidence of payment for equipment, materials, and labor, including payments to Subcontractors and Suppliers.
2. For application for progress payments, Contractor shall use the format required by the Agency. An electronic copy of the invoice form is available from the Engineer upon request.
Progress payments shall be signed, and the date of the invoice shall be the d ate that the invoice is submitted.
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
3. The Agency shall not pay progress or partial payments until Contractor submits to the Engineer an updated Schedule. It is solely the Contractor’s responsibility to prepare and submit the Schedule updates.
4. Disputed or incorrect applications shall be returned to the Contractor within 7 Calendar Days with documentation describing the reason for the rejection of the payment request.
ADD the following: 7-3.2.2 Amount of Progress Payments.
1. If an undisputed and properly submitted application for payment is received by the Engineer, the Agency shall pay Contractor within 30 Calendar Days after the Engineer receives the application for Payment consistent with Public Contract Code Section 20104.50. The Agency shall pay Contractor for the Work performed, including the payment for offsite stored materials per section 7-3.3.1.2, through the period covered by the application for payment if the payment amount before Retention does not exceed the percentage of completion of the Work as set forth in the SOV.
ADD the following: 7-3.2.2.1 Progress Payment for Pipelines. Not Used ADD the following: 7-3.2.3 Waiver of Claims at Final Payment.
1. Contractor’s acceptance of Final Payment constitutes a waiver of affirmative claims by Contractor, except those previously made in writing and identified as unsettled at the time of Final Payment, which are expressly reserved by Contractor from operation of its Release of Claims pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 7100 or other Applicable Law.
ADD the following: 7-3.2.4 Withholding of Payment and Back Charge.
1. The Engineer may withhold payment for any of the following reasons:
a. Defective or incomplete Work.
b. Stop notices, wage orders, or other withholdings required by Applicable Law. c. Contractor’s failure to comply with 5 -3.3, “Payroll Records” and the Contractor Registration and Electronic Reporting System requirements of the Contract Documents.
d. Failure to submit monthly Construction Schedule updates.
2. The Engineer may back charge the Contractor for any of the following reasons:
a. Defective or incorrect Work not remedied.
b. Damage to Agency property or a third party’s property that was caused by Contractor. c. Liquidated Damages.
d. Non-attendance at meetings without prior cancellation notice. e. Failed inspections or re-inspections paid by the Agency. 7-3.3 Delivered Materials
DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:
1. The cost of materials and equipment delivered but not incorporated into the Work will not be included in the progress estimate.
ADD the following: 7-3.3.1 Payment for Stored Materials on Site.
ADD the following: 7-3.3.1.1 General.
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
1. When authorized, Contractor may request payment for materials and equipment which has not been incorporated into the Work but will be at a later date and will be delivered and stored at the Project Site.
2. The material shall meet the Contract requirements and the material’s required test results and certifications shall be filed with the Engineer.
3. Only non -perishable materials for major items of Work or Materials Subject to Price Adjustment shall be considered for payment for on -site storage. However, each individual item has a value of more than 1% of the Contract Price and shall become a permanent part of the Work.
4. Materials cost shall be evidenced by the manufacturer’s paid invoice bearing the statement that Contractor has paid all invoices in full.
5. The payments for the stored materials shall not exceed the invoice price or 60% of the Bid prices for the pay items into which the materials are to be incorporated, whichever is less, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
6. Apply for the payment for materials stored on a form provided by the Engineer and attach documentation to show the following:
a. The amount paid on the invoice (or other record of production cost) for the stored items.
b. The dollar amount of the material incorporated into each of the various Work items for the month.
c. The amount that should be retained for stored materials. d. That Contractor has received the materials and equipment free and are clear of all liens, charges, secured interests, and encumbrances.
e. That the materials and equipment are covered by the appropriate property insurance in accordance with the insurance provisions and other arrangements that protect the Agency’s interest.
7. Contractor shall provide the Engineer, upon request and prior to any partial payment, documentation which transfers full legal title to such materials to the Agency conditional only upon receipt of the Final Payment. Such transfer of title or any partial p ayment shall not constitute acceptance by the Agency of the materials nor shall it void the right to reject materials subsequently found to be unsatisfactory in accordance with SECTION 4 – CONTROL OF MATERIALS. This shall also not relieve Contractor of any obligation arising under the Contract Documents.
8. The payments for materials on-site are subject to retention as set forth in 7-3.2, “Partial and Final Payment.”
9. Contractor shall assume all risks associated with the loss or damage to the stored products for which payment has or has not been received.
10. Equipment and materials shall be stored in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. The stored products shall be in a form ready for installation. The Agency shall not pay for raw materials or parts and pieces of equipment.
11. Any and all surplus materials that are not incorporated in the Work shall become Contractor’s property at no additional cost to the Agency.
12. Unless specifically provided in the Contract, payment for the materials on hand shall not be included when determining the percentage of Work completed.
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
13. The cost of materials reported shall be at invoice or lowest current price at which such materials are locally available and delivered to the job site in the quantities involved, plus sales tax, freight, and delivery.
The Agency reserves the right to approve materials and sources of supply, or to supply materials to the Contractor if necessary, for the progress of the Work. No markup shall be applied to any material provided by the Agency.
ADD the following: 7-3.3.1.2 Payment for Stored Materials Offsite.
1. The payment of materials and equipment delivered and stored offsite shall be contingent upon Contractor’s compliance with the storage and protective maintenance requirements set forth in the Contract Documents and all other requirements necessary to preserve equipment warranties for the benefit of the Agency.
2. The Agency reserves the right to refuse approval for the payment of any equipment or materials suitably stored offsite in its sole discretion, regardless of whether all conditions in the Contract Documents have been met.
3. Partial payment may be made for products eligible for offsite delivery and storage only upon Contractor’s presentation of a bill of sale, a paid invoice, or an affidavit certifying that the material is received by the Contractor free and clear of all liens, encumbrances, and secured interest of any kind including offsite delivery.
4. Partial payment for products delivered and stored offsite shall be contingent upon Contractor’s compliance with the storage and protective maintenance requirements set forth in the Contract Documents and all other requirements necessary to preserve equipme nt warranties for the benefit of the Agency.
5. The cost of materials and equipment delivered but not incorporated into the Work will not be included in the progress estimate.
6. Costs associated with the delivery to and storage at an offsite facility shall be at Contractor’s expense regardless of the Engineer’s approval to deliver and store the materials.
7. Contractor shall provide written evidence to the Engineer of having made arrangements for unrestricted access by the Agency and the Agency’s authorized representatives to the materials wherever stored, including provisions for the Agency to take control and possession of such materials at any time and without restriction. Contractor shall furnish the Engineer a permit of entry, from the owner of the property, for at least 6 months after the NOC has been filed. The permit of entry shall contain information similar to the following:
PERMIT OF ENTRY: Permission is granted to the Agency and its designated employees or agents to enter upon the property described in this permit for a period of not less than 6 months after the NOC has been filed for the Police & Fire Headquarters Chiller Replacement for the purpose of removing materials for which advance materials on hand payment has been made to (Contractor’s Name). The property is owned by (Owner’s Name) and is described as follows: (Address and Description of Property). (Include signature(s) and date(s) for owner and lessee or purchaser, and, if appropriate, attach a copy of a warehouse receipt or contract for storage.
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
8. The material shall be clearly marked and identified as being specifically fabricated, produced, and reserved for use on the Project. The Contractor shall provide payment documentation for the materials.
7-3.4 Mobilization.
ADD the following:
1. Mobilization consists of Work necessary for the movement of personnel, equipment, supplies, and incidentals to and from the Site; for establishment of all offices, buildings, storage yards, and other facilities necessary for the Work; and for all other Wor k and operations which shall be performed prior to beginning the Work and after completion of the Work on the various Contract items on the Site.
2. Contractor shall properly design the Project parameters to incorporate construction mobility for moving on and off the Site in a manner that limits disturbance to the surrounding residences, businesses, and any other citizens. This includes the designated staging ar eas, loading areas, and assemblage areas. Contractor shall consider and address access rights of the public at all times. Prepare a mobilization plan that shall describe and govern Contractor’s mobilization activities.
3. When a Bid item has been provided for “Mobilization,” payment for mobilization Work shall be distributed equally over the first 2 progress payments up to the Bid amount of the “Mobilization” Bid item but shall not exceed 3% of the Contract Price. If Contractor’s Bid item for “Mobilization” exceeds 3% of the Contract Price, then anything above 3% of the Contract Price shall be paid as a part of the Final Payment.
4. The complete dismantling and removal of all of Contractor’s properties, temporary facilities, equipment, materials, construction wastes, and personnel at the Site referred to as demobilization is included in the payment for mobilization, unless there is a Bid item for demobilization.
5. If a separate Bid item has not been provided for mobilization, the payment for mobilization is included in the Contract Price.
7-4 PAYMENT FOR EXTRA WORK
7-4.1 General.
ADD the following:
1. With every request for payment, Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a breakdown showing monthly and cumulative amounts of the Work performed under the Change Order by Contractor and Contractor’s Subcontractors. The reporting format shall be approved by the Engineer.
2. When the price for the Extra Work cannot be agreed upon, the Agency will pay for the Extra Work based on the accumulation of costs.
7-4.2 Basis for Establishing Costs.
7-4.2.1 Labor.
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
ADD the following:
1. The costs of labor will be the actual cost for wages of workers performing the Extra Work at the time the Extra Work is done, plus employer payments of payroll taxes, workers compensation insurance, liability insurance, health and welfare, pension, vacatio n, apprenticeship funds, and other direct costs, resulting from federal, state, or local laws, as well as assessments or benefits required by lawful collective bargaining agreements.
2. The use of a labor classification which would increase the Extra Work cost will not be permitted unless the Contractor establishes the necessity for such additional costs. Labor costs for equipment operators and helpers shall be reported only when such cos ts are not included in the invoice for equipment rental. The labor cost for foremen shall be proportionate to all their assigned work and only that applicable to Extra Work will be paid.
3. Nondirect labor costs, including superintendence, shall be considered part of the markup of Section 7-4.2.1(1).
4. The Agency reserves the right to request the following:
a. Financial records of salaries for an employee.
b. Wage rates/Certified Payroll.
c. Bonuses and deductions.
5. Contractor shall list the labor rates of its personnel and Subcontractors who work on the Project. The payment for payroll records is included in the Contract Price.
6. If Contractor’s proposal for Extra Work is based upon services and Work to be performed outside Normal Working Hours, the labor charges associated with the Extra Work shall consist of straight time wages and burdens plus the appropriate overtime or shift premium with no additional burdens, such as fringe benefits, on the premium portion. 7-4.2.2 Tool and Equipment Rental.
DELETE in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE with the following:
1. No payment shall be made for the use of tools which have a replacement value of $200 or less.
2. Regardless of ownership, the rates and delay factors to be used in determining equipment rental costs shall not exceed those listed in the latest edition of the Caltrans publication entitled “Labor Surcharge and Equipment Rental Rates” preceding the date t he Work is accomplished. The latest edition of the Caltrans publication is available at www.dot.ca.gov.
The delay factors therein shall be used as multipliers of the rental rates for determining the value of costs for delay to the Contractor and Subcontractors, if any. The labor surcharge rates published therein are not a part of this Contract.
3. Contractor shall be entitled to a rental rate adjustment when Contractor can substantiate that the rental rates prevailing locally exceed the published rates by more than 15%. For equipment not listed in the Caltrans publication, rental rates shall not exc eed listed rates prevailing locally at equipment rental agencies or distributors at the time the Work is performed.
4. Whenever possible, Extra Work shall be accomplished using equipment available on Site or owned by Contractor. If a specific piece of equipment shall be rented to be used exclusively
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
for the Extra Work, the rental rate shall be the invoiced rate. The rental rates paid shall include the cost of fuel, oil, lubrication, supplies, small tools, necessary attachments, repairs and maintenance of any kind, depreciation, storage, insurance, and all incidentals. Necessary loading and transportation costs for equipment used on the Extra Work shall be included.
5. If rental equipment is not being used or used intermittently and could be returned to its rental source rather than holding it at the Work Site, the Contractor shall return the equipment at no expense to the Agency unless Contractor elects to keep it at the Work Site at Contractor’s expense.
6. The reported rental time for equipment already at the Work Site shall be the duration of its use on the Extra Work. This time shall begin when equipment is first used on Extra Work, plus the time required to move it from its previous site and back or from its previous site to a closer site.
7. All equipment shall be acceptable to the Engineer, in good working condition, and suitable for the purpose for which it is to be used.
7-4.2.3 Materials.
The cost of materials reported shall be at invoice or lowest current price at which such materials are locally available and delivered to the job Site in the quantities involved, plus sales tax, freight, and delivery.
The Agency reserves the right to approve materials and sources of supply, or to supply materials to the Contractor if necessary, for the progress of the Work. No markup shall be applied to any material provided by the Agency.
7-4.2.4 Invoices.
Vendors’ invoices for material, equipment rental and other expenditures shall be submitted with the request for payment. If the request for payment is not substantiated by invoices or other documentation, the Agency may establish the cost of the item involved at the lowest price which was current at the time of the report.
7-4.3 Markup.
7-4.3.1 Work by the Contractor.
DELETE in its entirety and REPLACE with the following:
The following percentages shall be added to the Contractor’s costs and shall constitute the markup for all overhead and profits:
Labor 20
Materials 15
Equipment Rental 15
Other Items and Expenditures 15
To the sum of the costs and markups provided for in this section, 1 % shall be added as compensation for bonding.
7-4.3.2 Work by a Subcontractor.
DELETE in its entirety and REPLACE with the following:
00 73 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
When all or any part of the Extra Work is performed by a Subcontractor, the markup established in 7-4.3.1 shall be applied to the Subcontractor’s actual cost of such Work. A markup of 10 percent on the first $5,000 of the subcontracted portion of the Extra Work and a markup of 5 percent on Work added in excess of $5,000 of the subcontracted portion of the Extra Work may be added by the Contractor.
7-4.4 Daily Reports.
ADD the following:
Payment for Extra Work will not be made until such time that the Contractor submits completed daily reports and all supporting documents to the Engineer.
When the price for the Extra Work cannot be agreed upon, the Contractor shall submit a daily report to the Engineer on forms approved by the Agency. Included are applicable delivery tickets, listing all labor, materials, and equipment involved for that day , and other services and expenditures when authorized. Payment for Extra Work will not be made until such time that the Contractor submits completed daily reports and all supporting documents to the Engineer.
Failure to submit the daily report by the close of the next Working Day may waive any rights for that day. An attempt shall be made to reconcile the report daily, and it shall be signed by the Engineer and the Contractor. In the event of disagreement, pertinent notes shall be entered by each party to e xplain points which cannot be resolved immediately. Each party shall retain a signed copy of the report. Reports by Subcontractors or others shall be submitted through the Contractor.
The report shall:
1. Show names of workers, classifications, and hours worked.
2. Describe and list quantities of materials used.
3. Show type of equipment, size, identification number, and hours of operation, including loading and transportation, if applicable.
4. Describe other services and expenditures in such detail as the Agency may require.
END OF SECTION
00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
INTRODUCTION
The Specifications contained in this 00 7400 Agency Supplemental Technical Provisions take precedence over the specification language contained in the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, "The Greenbook" latest edition and all errata. This specification addresses the unique conditions in Carlsbad that are not addressed in The Greenbook. Therefore, if there is a conflict, these Specifications shall control.
The Greenbook may be purchased at Bidder/Contractors local technical bookstore or directly from the publisher. These Agency Supplemental General Provisions are available only for download from the online bidding portal with Contract Documents. The Agency does not provide hard copies.
When used in the Contract Documents, statements or command phrases (active voice and imperative mood) refer to and are directed at the “Bidder” or “Contractor” as applicable. The Specifications are written to the “Bidder” before award and the “Contractor” after award. Before award, interpret sentences written in the imperative mood as starting with “The Bidder shall .” Interpret the term “you” as “the Bidder” and interpret the term “your” as “the Bidder’s .” After award, interpret sentences written in the imperative mood starting with “The Contractor shall .” Interpret the term “you” as “the Contractor” and interpret the term “your” as “the Contractor’s.
Where a section is identified as (Not Used) or “Not Used”, The Greenbook specification shall control and no modifications to the Greenbook language are proposed.
PART 2 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
SECTION 200 – ROCK MATERIALS
200-2 UNTREATED BASE MATERIALS
200-2.1 General.
ADD the following:
1. Aggregate base shall be Crushed Aggregate Base per Greenbook Section 200 -2 and as specified in this section.
200-2.2 Crushed Aggregate Base.
200-2.2.1 General.
ADD the following:
Crushed Aggregate Base shall be free from organic matter and other deleterious substances, and shall be of such nature that it can be compacted readily under watering and rolling to form a firm, stable base.
1. The aggregate shall not be treated with lime, cement or other chemical material before tests are performed.
2. Samples for testing shall represent every 500 cubic yards or one day's production, whichever is smaller. If the results of the aggregate grading tests do not meet the requirements for Percentage Passing Sieve as specified in Table 200-2.2.2, but meet the Quality Requirements as specified in Table 200 -2.2.3, placement of the aggregate base may be continued for the remainder of that day. However, another day's Work may not be started until test results
00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
indicate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the next material to be used in the Work will comply with the requirements specified for Percentage Passing Sieve.
3. If the results of both the aggregate grading and Sand Equivalent tests do not meet the requirements of Section 200-2.2, the aggregate base which is represented by these tests shall be removed. However, if requested by the Contractor, and approved at the sole discretion of the Engineer, the aggregate base may remain in place and the Contractor shall pay to the Agency $50 per cubic yard for such aggregate base left in place. The Agency may deduct this amount from any moneys due, or that may be come due, to the Contractor under the Contract.
SECTION 203 – BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
203-1 PAVING ASPHALT.
203-1.3 Test Reports and Certification.
DELETE in its entirety and REPLACE with the following:
1. Paving asphalt shall be supplied by Caltrans or other State Department of Transportation approved vendors unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions. At delivery time, the supplying vendor shall deliver to the purchaser a certified copy of the test report. This report shall indicate the vendor's name, grade of paving asphalt delivered, date/ time and point of delivery, quantity delivered, ticket number, purchase order number, and results of specified tests. The certified test report and the testing required in connection with the report shall be submitted in accordance with 3-8.4.
2. Final acceptance of the material will be dependent upon the determination by the Engineer that the material involved conforms to the Specifications. 203-6 ASPHALT CONCRETE.
203-6.1 General.
DELETE in its entirety and REPLACE with the following:
1. Asphalt concrete shall be the product of mixing mineral aggregate and up to 20 percent RAP with asphalt binder at a central mixing plant.
2. When specified in the Special Provisions, asphalt concrete may contain greater than 20 percent RAP or be produced using a WMA technology.
3. Asphalt concrete containing any modified paving asphalt or WMA technology or WMA additive shall not include more than 15 percent RAP.
4. Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the Plans, asphalt concrete mixtures shall conform to 203-6.4.
203-6.2.5.4 Testing.
DELETE the fourth sentence and REPLACE with the following:
1. When using greater than 20 percent RAP, the following additional tests shall be performed:
SECTION 209 – PRESSURE PIPE
209-1 IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS.
209-1.1 Ductile Iron Pipe (DIP).
209.-1.1.1 General
00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
ADD the following:
1. Ductile iron pipe and fittings and installation shall be as shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions and shall conform with the City of Carlsbad Engineering Standards, Volumes 2 and 3.
209-1.1.2 Materials.
DELETE entirely and replace with the following:
1. Unless otherwise specified, ductile iron pipe shall conform to the following:
TABLE 209 -1.1.2
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Pipe Manufacturing
Standards
Conform to AWWA C151/ANSI 21.5 for 3”-64” (75
mm – 1600 mm) pipe.
Design Standards Conform to AWWA C150/ANSI A21.50 and AWWA M41.
NSF Certification NSF 61 certification required for potable water pipe.
Material Ductile iron.
Size As shown on the Plans.
Minimum Wall
Thickness
3”-12” (75 mm – 300 mm)
pipe
Pressure Class 350.
14” – 36” (350 mm – 900
mm) pipe
Pressure Class 250.
42” – 64” (1050 mm –
1600 mm) pipe
Pressure Class 200.
Pipe with threaded flanges Per AWWA C115/ANSI
21.15. Pipe with grooved
couplings
Thickness Class 53.
Markings Conform to AWWA C151 Section 4.6.
Lengths 18’ or 20’ (5.5 m or 6.1 m) lengths per AWWA
C151/ANSI A21.51.
Shorter lengths may be used to facilitate curves or
fit horizontal or vertical alignment.
Interior Lining
and Exterior
Coating
Buried Exterior
Coatings
Shop coat with 1 prime coat of asphaltic coating
approximately 1 mil (25 µm) thick per AWWA C151.
Exterior Coatings on
Pipe Above Ground
and in Vaults
Conform to 212-12.
Cement-Mortar
Interior Lining
(AWWA C104
“Double Thickness”
Pipe Size Lining Thickness
3” – 12” (75 mm – 300
mm) pipe
1/8” (3 mm)
14” – 24” (350 mm – 0600
mm) pipe
3/16” (5 mm)
00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
30” – 64” (900 mm – 1600
mm) pipe
1/4” (6 mm)
Conform to AWWA C104 using Type II cement
Fusion-Bonded
Epoxy Interior Lining
where shown on the
Plans
Conform to 212-12.
Ceramic Epoxy
Interior Lining,
where shown on the
Plans
Amine cured novalac epoxy lining.
Permeability rating of 0.00.
Abrasion resistance < 4 mils (100 µm) loss after
1,000,000 cycles on ± 22.5 sliding aggregate slurry
abrasion test using a sharp natural siliceous gravel
with particle size between 2 mm and 10 mm.
Joints Standard Push-on
Style
AWWA C111/ANSI 21.11
Mechanical Joint AWWA C111/ANSI 21.11
Flange (threaded) AWWA C115/ANSI 21.15
Restrained Style Special push-on type joint providing longitudinal restraint to full test pressure without relying on
thrust block.
Boltless, restrained push-on joint design with
positive axial locking restrained system capable of
deflection after assembly.
Use 1 type of restrained joint exclusively for all
Work.
Bell Joint
Gaskets
Material Conform to AWWA C111-ANSI A21.11.
Vulcanized styrene butadiene rubber (SBR).
Material for
Hydrocarbon
Applications and
Contaminated Soils
NBR (Nitrile) (acrylonitrile butadiene), FLUOREL, or
FKM (Viton) (fluorocarbon).
Gasket Age < 180 Calendar Days old or > 2 years old but retested < 60 Calendar Days prior to installation
Flange Gaskets Material 212-2.7.
Fittings Material Ductile iron.
Standards Conform to AWWA C110/ANSI 21.10 or AWWA
C153/ANSI A21.53.
Style Push-on (standard) with restrained joint (as shown), or flanged. Mechanical joint with special approval.
Marking Cast letters “DI” or “DUCTILE” into fittings, unless otherwise specified.
Cast “AWWA C110” or “AWWA C153” depending
on thickness.
00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Exterior Coatings Use same coating as adjacent pipe, as specified above.
Interior Linings Use same lining as adjacent pipe, as specified above.
Ductile Iron
Pipe Joint
Restraints
Material Ductile iron.
Style Gripping wedge
Design Pressure
Rating
3” – 16” (75 mm – 400
mm)
350 psi (2.4 MPa)
18” – 64” (450 mm – 1600
mm)
250 psi (1.7 MPa)
Pipe Shop Coat Prime Coat 12 mils (300 µm) MDFT.
Polyethylene
PE Encasement
Polyethylene Film
and Tape
Conform to 212-12.1.1.
Color per 212-12.2
Alternate to
Polyethylene
Encasement
Pipe Finish Coat 15 mils (375 µm) MDFT field-applied bitumastic coating.
209-2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS.
209-2.1 General.
ADD the following:
1. Steel pipe and fittings and installation shall conform with the City of Carlsbad Engineering Standards, Volumes 2 and 3.
209-2.3 Mill-Type Steel Pipe.
209-2.3.1 Materials.
DELETE entirely and replace with the following:
1. Unless otherwise specified, mill-type steel pipe shall conform to the following:
TABLE 209 -2.3.1
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Pipe Manufacturing
Standards
Furnace-welded, electrically welded or seamless pipe
conforming to AWWA C200 for pipe 6” (150 mm) and
larger or ANSI B36.10 for pipe smaller than 6” (150 mm) or for pipe with wall thickness specified by strength or schedule on the Plans.
Design
Standards
Conform to AWWA M11.
NSF
Certification
NSF 61 certification required for potable water pipe.
Material ASTM A53 Grade A or B, ASTM A134 (steel plate per ASTM A283 Grades C or D or A36), ASTM A135, or ASTM
A139.
Size As shown on Plans.
00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Conform to dimensional tolerances of AWWA C200 for
pipe ≥ 6” (150 mm) identified on the Plans by class,
gauge or decimal wall thickness.
Conform to ANSI B36.10 for pipe > 6” (150 mm) or for
pipe specified on the Plans by strength or wall-thickness schedule.
Minimum Wall
Thickness
Where the Plans do not show thickness, submit design
and supporting calculations prepared by the
manufacturer in accordance with AWWA M11 using a
maximum design working stress of 1/2 the yield stress
for the grade of steel used in pipe fabrication. Compute wall thickness using pressure equal to 250 psi (1.72
MPa) or the design pressure shown on the Plans plus 50
psi, whichever is greater.
No pipe 4” (100 mm) and larger outside buildings or
vaults shall have a wall thickness less than 14 -gauge
(1.9 mm)
No pipe 4” (100 mm) and larger inside buildings or
vaults shall have a wall thickness less than 3/8” (9.5
mm).
Markings Mark each special and each length of straight pipe at bell end to identify:
• Manufacturer’s name or mark
• Type of steel
• Design pressure
• Diameter and weight of pipe or special
• Proper location of pipe or special by reference
to layout schedule
Lengths Furnish in single random lengths, double random lengths, or in specified cut lengths.
For single random lengths, average length shall not be
less than 17.5’ (5.3 m) and no piece shall be shorter
than 9’ (2.7 m).
For double random lengths average length shall not be
less than 35’ (10.7 m), not less than 10^ of pieces shall be shorter than 26.25’ (8.0 m) and no piece shall be
shorter than 14’ (2.7 m).
For specified cut lengths, the actual pipe length shall not vary from the specified length by more than 1/8” (3 mm).
Interior
Lining and
Cement-
Mortar Interior
Conform to AWWA C205 and AWWA C602 using Type
II/V cement.
00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Exterior
Coating
(Required
on exposed
steel
surfaces and
ring joints)
Lining and
Exterior
Coating
Trim mortar lining as necessary to allow full operation of butterfly or check valves at connections to steel pipe.
Line exposed portions of pipe interior with hand -
applied epoxy conforming to 212-12.
3/4” (19 mm) min coating thickness unless otherwise
shown or soil is identified as corrosive.
Trim coating 6” to 12” (150 mm to 300 mm) above
grade on spools penetrating to daylight or vault
interiors.
Cold-Applied
Tape Exterior
Coatings
Conform to AWWA C209 for the exterior of specials,
connections, and fittings.
Conform to AWWA C214 for steel pipeline coatings.
Liquid Epoxy
Interior Lining
and Exterior
Coating of
Above-Ground
Pipe
Conform to AWWA C210 and 212-12.
Fusion-Bonded
Epoxy Interior
Lining and
Exterior
Coating of
Above-Ground
Pipe
Conform to AWWA C213 and 212-12.
Extruded
Polyolefin
Exterior
Coatings
Conform to AWWA C215 for extruded coatings.
Conform to AWWA C216 for heat -shrinkable cross -
linked coatings.
Joints Ends Prepared
for
Mechanical-
Coupled Field
Joints
Conform to AWWA C200 Section 4.13.
Square cut or beveled with no burrs . Outside surfaces
where coupling seats shall be free of indentations,
projections, or roll marks to ensure watertight seal.
Pipe ends shall have the tolerances within limits
required by the mechanical coupling manufacturer.
Field-Butt-
Welded Joints
Pipe with wall thickness 15/64” (6.0 mm) or greater,
intended for field butt welding. Bevel pipe on outside, inside or both sides as shown or specified. Bevel angle shall be 30 to 35 degrees measured from plane
perpendicular to pipe axis. Width of root fac e at pipe end shall be 1/32” to 3/32” (0.8 mm to 2.3 mm)
Flanged Joint Forged steel conforming to ASTM A181 Faced and dimensioned in accordance with ASME/ANSI B16.5 for
00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
the pressure class shown on the Plants or specified in
the Special Provisions.
Threads for screwed flanges and companion pipe ends
shall conform to ASME/ANSI B1.20.1.
Pipe ends for welding neck flanges shall be beveled.
Flange
Gaskets
Material 212-2.7
Fittings Material Same steel as pipe.
Standards Manufacture from mill -type steel pipe in accordance with ASME/ANSI B16.9.
Exterior
Coatings
Use same coating as adjacent pipe, as specified above.
Interior Linings Use same lining as adjacent pipe, as specified above. 209-4 PVC PRESSURE PIPE.
209-4.1 General.
ADD the following:
1. PVC pipe and fittings and installation shall conform with the City of Carlsbad Engineering Standards, Volumes 2 and 3.
209-4.2 Materials.
DELETE entirely and replace with the following:
1. Unless otherwise specified, PVC pressure pipe shall conform to the following:
TABLE 209-4.2
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Pipe Manufacturing
Standards
Conform to AWWA C900 for pipe 4” – 60” (100 mm – 1,500
mm).
Design
Standards
Conform to AWWA M23 using hydraulic design basis
below.
NSF
Certification
NSF 61 certification required for potable water pipe.
Material Virgin rigid poly-vinyl-chloride.
Conform to ASTM D1784 Cell Class 12454B or better.
Conform to NSF 13.
Conform to AWWA C900 Section 4.2.
Markings (each
pipe)
Conform to AWWA C900 Section 6.1.
Mark applicable AWWA standard.
Show nominal pipe diameter.
Show AWWA pressure class or DR.
Show NSF 61 stamp (for potable water service).
Show manufacturer and manufacturing date code.
Size As shown on the Plans.
00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Conform to outside diameter of ductile iron pipe unless otherwise shown.
Minimum Wall
Thickness
(Dimension
Ratio)
Design Pressure and Diameter
Shown on the Plans
Minimum Dimension
Ratio
0-100 psi (.7 MPa)
4” – 16” (100 mm – 400 mm)
DR 18 (Class 235)
100-200 psi (1.0 MPa)
4” – 16” (100 mm – 400 mm)
DR 14 (Class 305)
Greater than 200 psi (1.4 MPa) or
greater than 16”
Use DIP or Steel Pipe
Pipe with Grooved Couplings Use DIP or Steel Pipe
Lengths Laying lengths shall be 20’ with option to supply up to 15% random (minimum length 10’) sections
Joints Standard Push -
on Style
Conform to ASTM D3139.
Bell Joint
Gaskets
Material Elastomeric membrane per AWWA C900 Section 4.2.4 (Gaskets and Lubricants) and ASTM F477.
Butadiene styrene (SBR or BR) for potable water.
Ethylene propylene (EPM or EPDM) for recycled water.
Material for
Hydrocarbon
Applications
and
Contaminated
Soils
Elastomeric membrane per AWWA C900 Section 4.2.4
(Gaskets and Lubricants) and ASTM F477.
NBR (Nitrile) (acrylonitrile butadiene), FLUOREL or FKM (Viton) (fluorocarbon).
Gasket Age < 180 Calendar Days old or
< 2 years old but retested < 60 Calendar Days prior to
installation
Fittings Material Ductile iron.
Standards Conform to AWWA C110/ANSI 21.10 or AWWA C153/ANSI A21.53.
Style Push-on (standard) or restrained joint (as shown).
Marking Cast letters “DI” or “DUCTILE” into fittings, unless otherwise specified.
Exterior
Coatings
1 mil (25 µm) petroleum asphaltic coating.
Interior Linings Cement mortar (double thickness).
Plastic Film
Wrap for
Corrosion
Protection
Conform to 212-12.1.1.
Color per 212-12.2.
00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
209-5 HIGH-DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) SOLID WALL PRESSURE PIPE. 209-5.1 General.
ADD the following:
1. HDPE pipe and fittings and installation shall conform with the City of Carlsbad Engineering Standards, Volumes 2 and 3.
209-5.2 Materials.
DELETE in its entirety and replace with the following:
1. Unless otherwise specified, HDPE pressure pipe shall conform to the following.
TABLE 209-5.2
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Pipe Manufacturing
Standards
(Potable
Water Pipe)
Conform to AWWA C901 for pipe 1/2” – 3” (12.5 mm – 75
mm).
Conform to AWWA C906 for pipe 4” – 63” (100 mm – 1575
mm).
Manufacturing
Standards
(Non-Potable
Water Pipe)
Conform to ASTM F714
Design
Standards
Conform to AWWA M55.
NSF
Certification
NSF 61 certification required for potable water pipe.
Material ASTM D3350 PE 4710 Cell classification 4454 or higher.
Conform to AWWA C901 Section 4.2 or AWWA C906
Section 4.2 as appropriate.
Markings
(each pipe)
Conform to AWWA C901 or C906 Section 6.1.
Mark applicable AWWA standard.
Show nominal pipe diameter.
Show standard material code designation.
Show AWWA pressure class or DR.
Show NSF 61 stamp (for potable water service).
Show manufacturer and manufacturing date code.
Size 1-1/4” – 63” (32 mm – 1575 mm) diameter as shown on the Plans.
Ductile iron pipe size (DIPS) outside diameter for pipe 4” – 48” (100 mm – 1200 mm) unless otherwise shown.
Iron pipe size (IPS) outside diameter for pipe ≤ 4” (100 mm) or > 48” (1200 mm).
Minimum Wall
Thickness
(Dimension
Ratio)
Design Pressure Shown on the
Plans
Minimum Dimension
Ratio
0-80 psi (0.6 MPa) DR 21
80-100 psi (0.7 MPa) DR 17
00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
100-150 psi (1.0 MPa) DR 11
150-200 psi (1.4 MPa) DR 9
Greater than 200 psi Use ductile iron or
steel
Joints Style Thermal butt fusion for joining pipe in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Flanged for connections to appurtenances and other pipe materials in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Flange Back -
up Ring
Provide flange back -up ring of Type 316 SS or fusion
bonded epoxy coated ductile iron.
Design
Pressure
Match design pressure rating of pipe shown on the Plans.
Fusion
Fittings
Standards ASTM D2683 socket -type, ASTM D3261 butt -type, or ASTM F1055 electrofusion (fittings shall be marked as
complying).
Material HDPE conforming to pipe specifications.
Pressure
Rating
De-rated pressure of fitting shall meet or exceed design pressure rating of pipe shown on the Plans.
Adaptor
Fittings (For
Connections
to Flanged
Fittings)
Internal
Stiffener Ring
Required for mechanical joint connections.
Backup Ring Stainless steel.
Thrust
Restraint.
HDPE in -line wall anchors and thrust blocks and per
manufacturer’s requirements.
209-7 PIPELINE IDENTIFICATION.
209-7.2 Requirements.
DELETE in its entirety and replace with the following:
1. Pipeline identification shall conform to the following:
TABLE 209-7.2
Function Type Materials/Method
Pipe Contents
Identification
Pipe Color
(Plastic Pipe
or Polywrap)
Blue for Potable Water.
Purple for Recycled Water.
Green for Sewage.
AND
Stenciling Stenciling marked on pipe in contrasting color to background color of pipe stating:
“POTABLE WATER,”
“CAUTION RECYCLED WATER – DO NOT DRINK” or ”CAUTION
SEWER” as appropriate.
5/8” (16 mm) high letters.
Repeated at 1 foot (300 mm) intervals.
00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
Function Type Materials/Method
OR
Identification
Tape
Polyethylene tape 6” (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (100 µm)
minimum thickness with 2” (50 mm) high letters stating:
“POTABLE WATER ,” “CAUTION RECYCLED WATER – DO NOT
DRINK” or “CAUTION SEWER” as appropriate.
For pipe > 12” (300 mm) diameter, use 12” (300 mm) wide tape.
Color – Blue with black or white letters for potable water, Purple with black or white letters for recycled water,
Green with black or white letters for sewage.
Attached to top of pipe with adhesive tape.
Pipe Warning
and Locating
Warning and
Locating
Tape
Polyethylene tape 6” (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (100 µm)
minimum thickness with 2” (50 mm) high letters stating:
“CAUTION: WATERLINE BURIED BELOW ,” “CAUTION:
RECLAIMED WATERLINE BURIED BELOW – DO NOT DRINK,” or
“CAUTION: SEWER BURIED BELOW” as appropriate.
For pipe > 12” (300 mm) diameter, use 12” (300 mm) wide tape.
Color – blue with black or white letters for potable water, Purple with black or white letters for recycled water,
Green with black or white letters for sewage.
Place in pipe trench 18” (450 mm) above pipe.
Tape shall contain metallic strip that can be registered by magnetic field locating device.
OR
Locating
Wire
In lieu of installing metallic warning tape; non -metallic warning tape 18” (450 mm) above pipe and 10 -guage copper wire attached to top of pipe and accessibly terminated may be used.
212-3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS, CASINGS SPACERS, AND WALL PENETRATIONS. 212-3.4 Rubber Annular Hydrostatic Sealing Devices.
212-3.4.1 General.
DELETE the last sentence and REPLACE with the following:
1. The sealing device shall be capable of sealing a minimum hydrostatic pressure of 20 psi. 212-5 VALVES.
212-5.5.1.2 Materials.
DELETE TABLE 212-5.5.1.2 in its entirety and REPLACE with the following:
00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
TABLE 212-5.5.1.2
Item Option Reference
Specification/Requirements
Body and Cover Ductile Iron or ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12.
Body and Cover for
Pressures over 250 psi
(1.7 MPa)
Ductile Iron ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12.
Disc and Disc Arm Ductile Iron ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12.
Seat SAE Type 316 Stainless Steel ASTMA276.
Pivot Shaft SAE Type 316 Stainless Steel ASTMA276.
212-10 SERVICE LATERALS, METERS, AND METER BOXES.
212-10.3 Corporation Stops, Angle Meter Valves, Service Saddles and Other Service Materials.
DELETE the last sentence of the first paragraph and REPLACE with the following:
1. Unless otherwise shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions, service saddles and corporation stop inlets shall be threaded per NPT tapered per ANSI B1.20.1.
ADD the following: 212-13 TRACER WIRE FOR NON-METALLIC PIPE. 212-13.1 General.
1. Tracer wire shall conform to the following:
a) Conductor: Minimum 10 AWG, copper clad steel or solid copper (direct burial) or 8 AWG, copper clad steel (directional drilling), rated for 30 volts. b) Break load: minimum 600-lb (direct burial); 2,500-lb (directional drilling) c) Insulation: High Molecular Weight Polyethylene (HMWPE), minimum 30 -mil (direct burial); 45-mil (directional drilling). Color per the APWA uniform color code. d) Splices and connectors: For direct burial only, moisture displacement and corrosion proof, direct bury splice kits, UL rated for 600 volts.
SECTION 216 – PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BOX
216-4 TESTING REQUIREMENTS.
216-4.2.2 Acceptance.
DELETE the first paragraph and REPLACE with the following:
1. When the average compressive strength of all cylinders tested is equal to or greater than the specified compressive strength of the PCC, and not more than 10 percent of the cylinders tested have an average compressive strength less than 90 percent of the s pecified compressive strength, and no cylinder tested has a compressive strength less than 85 percent of the specified compressive strength, the lot will be accepted.
SECTION 217 – BEDDING AND BACKFILL MATERIALS
217-1 BEDDING MATERIAL.
217-1.1 General.
ADD the following:
1. Bedding for pressure pipe of any material shall conform with the City of Carlsbad Engineering Standards, Volumes 2 and 3.
00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
217-1.2 Bedding Material for Plastic Pipe.
DELETE the second paragraph and REPLACE with the following:
1. For HDPE, PVC solid wall, and PE solid wall pipe in gravity applications, the bedding material shall be crushed rock conforming to the requirements shown in Table 217 -1.2 unless otherwise specified or shown on the Plans.
217-2 TRENCH BACKFILL.
217-2.1 General.
DELETE TABLE 217-2.1 and replace with the following:
TABLE 217-2.1
Zone Zone Limits Maximum Rock
Size
(greatest
dimension)
Sand Equivalent
(Excluding Rock)
Backfill Zone From subgrade to
12” (300 mm) above
top of pipe or
conduit
4” (150 mm) Not less than 20 unless
otherwise shown on
the Plans or specified in
the Special Provisions.
00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
PART 3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS (Not Used)
PART 4 EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 400 – PROTECTION AND RESTORATION
SECTION 401 – REMOVAL
401-3 CONCRETE AND MASONRY IMPROVEMENTS.
401-3.2 Concrete Curb, Walk, Gutters, Cross Gutters, Curb Ramps, Driveway and Alley Intersections.
DELETE in its entirety and REPLACE with the following:
1. Concrete shall be removed to neatly sawed edges with saw cuts made through the entire thickness. Concrete sidewalk or driveway to be removed shall be neatly sawed in straight lines either parallel to the curb or at right angles to the alignment of the sidewalk. No section to be replaced shall be smaller than 30 inches (750 mm) in either length or width.
All existing concrete shall be removed to the nearest joint. Concrete shall be removed to neatly sawed edges with saw cuts made to a depth deep enough to produce a clean straight break without loosening, cracking or damaging adjoining improvements. Curb an d gutter shall be sawed on a neat line at right angles to the curb face. PCC and all other material unsuitable for use as fill, as determined by the Engineer, shall be removed from the right-of- way and disposed of by the Contractor at a site of his own cho ice and shall pay all costs incidental to the disposal.
ADD the following: 401-3.2.1 Adjacent Asphalt Concrete (AC/AB) Sawcut and Removal.
1. Adjacent AC/AB sawcut and removal associated with concrete construction shall be full depth and a minimum width of 12 inches from face of concrete edge and continue along the concrete scheduled for removal. Removal and disposal of adjoining AC/AB section s hall be incidental to the removal of concrete structure Bid item per this Section. Replacement of adjoining AC/AB section shall be incidental to replacement of the concrete as specified in Section 303-5.
SECTION 402 – UTILITIES
402-1 LOCATION.
402-1.1 General.
DELETE the first paragraph and REPLACE with the following:
1. Known utilities and their respective owners are shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions and their locations are based on available records. The accuracy and/or completeness of the utilities shown on the Plans is not guaranteed and actual locations must be confirmed by potholing. Where underground utilities are shown on the Plans, the Contractor shall assume every property parcel will be served by a service connection for each type of utility.
INSERT, after the first sentence of the third paragraph, the following:
Subsurface installations shall be located at least 5 Working Days and at least 500 feet in advance of any construction heading and the results reported in written form to the Engineer.
AMEND letter d) to read as follows:
d) horizontal location with reference to Project stationing. 00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
402-2 PROTECTION.
DELETE the first 3 paragraphs and REPLACE with the following:
1. The Contractor shall not interrupt the service function or disturb the support of any utility without authority from the utility owner or direction from the Engineer. Valves, switches, vaults, and meters shall be maintained readily accessible for emergency shutoff. Excavation of soils providing support to pressure pipeline thrust blocks may require isolation and de - pressurization of the pipeline prior to the installation of support devices and the Contractor shall coordinate such Work with the utility owner.
2. Where a vertical separation distance of 12 inches cannot be attained between a proposed utility and an existing utility greater than 4 inches in diameter, place a 1-inch thick neoprene or silicone pad with Shore A durometer hardness of 50 to 70 (ASTM D2240) in contact with the top of the lower utility and backfill with Portland cement concrete sand conforming to 203-1.5.5 to 3 inches above the bottom of the upper utility. The width of the pad shall be equal to the width of the trench and the length shall extend 1 foot beyond the outer limits of the existing utility.
3. Where protection is required to ensure support of utilities located as shown on the Plans or in accordance with 402-1, the Contractor shall, unless otherwise specified, furnish and place the necessary protection at its expense.
4. Upon learning of the existence and location of any utility omitted from the Plans, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer in writing. When authorized by the Engineer, support or protection of the utility will be paid for as provided in 7-3 or 7-4. 402-4 RELOCATION.
DELETE paragraphs 3 and 4 and REPLACE with the following:
1. When the Plans or Special Provisions provide for the Contractor to alter, relocate, or reconstruct a utility, all costs for such Work, including temporary utility service, shall be included in the Bid for the items of Work necessitating such Work. Temporary or permanent relocation or alteration of utilities requested by the Contractor for its convenience shall be its responsibility and it shall make all arrangements and bear all costs.
2. The Contractor will relocate service connections as necessary within the limits of the Work or within temporary construction or slope easements in accordance with the procedures and upon the approval of the utility owner. When directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall arrange for the relocation of service connections as necessary between the meter and property line, or between a meter and the limits of temporary construction or slope easements. Payment for the relocation of such service connections sha ll be in accordance with 7-3 unless otherwise specified in the Bid. Payment will include disconnection of existing service connections from the utility main, capping or plugging existing outlets on the utility main, abandoning the service connection, and t he restoration of all existing improvements which may be affected by the service connection relocation. The Contractor may agree with the owner of any utility to disconnect and reconnect private interfering service connections.
Unless otherwise specified in the Bid, disconnection and reconnection of private services will be outside of the scope of the Work and the Agency will not be involved in any such agreement.
00 74 00 AGENCY SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL PROVISIONS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
402-5 DELAYS DUE TO UTILITY CONFLICTS.
DELETE paragraphs 1 through 4 and REPLACE with the following:
1. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of its Construction Schedule insofar as it affects the protection, removal, or relocation of utilities. The notification shall be included as a part of the Construction Schedule in accordance with 6-1 which shall be revised upon the completion of utility potholing and evaluation for potential utility conflicts. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of any subsequent changes in the Construction Schedule which will affect the time available for protection, removal, or relocation of utilities.
2. The Contractor will not be entitled to damages or additional payment for delays attributable to utility relocations or alterations if correctly located, noted, and completed in accordance with 402-1.
3. The Contractor may be given an extension of time for unforeseen delays attributable to unreasonably protracted interference by utilities in performing Work correctly shown on the Plans.
4. The Agency will determine the scope of Work for the removal, relocation, or protection of existing main or trunk line utility facilities within the area affected by the Work if such utilities are not identified in the Contract Documents. The Contractor will not be assessed liquidated damages for any delay caused by the removal, relocation, or protection of such existing facilities.
402-6 COOPERATION.
DELETE in its entirety and REPLACE with the following:
1. When necessary, the Contractor shall so conduct its operations as to permit access to the Work Site by the Agency or the utility owner and provide time for utility Work to be accomplished during the progress of the Work.
1. PART 5 PIPELINE SYSTEM REHABILITATION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK Date Printed: May 6, 2025
Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
SECTION 2
01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
a. The Contractor shall perform Work and furnish materials, labor, tools, equipment or services that may be reasonably inferred as being required to produce the intended result, whether specifically called for in the Contract Documents, at no additional cost to the Agency.
b. Visible, existing improvements for which no specific disposition is made on the Plans, but which interfere with the Work, shall be removed, and disposed of by the Contractor with the prior approval of the Engineer.
c. The completed Work will provide the Agency with two new 50 -ton chillers, a new electrical distribution board, and improved drainage in the central plant area, as more fully described in the Drawings and the technical specifications. Provide all labor, material and equipment for the following:
1. Selective demolition of the existing electrical, control wiring/devices and waterlines serving the existing chiller;
2. Removal and disposal of the existing 100-ton chiller;
3. Selective demolition of the electrical feeding various equipment in the central plant area served by the existing electrical distribution cabinet;
4. Removal and disposal of the existing electrical distribution cabinet;
5. Selective concrete demolition in areas of the central plant to accommodate new drainage grate system, and housekeeping pad expansion for chillers;
6. Install new concrete drainage grate system and housekeeping pad extension per the project plans and specifications;
7. Install conduits, wiring and new electrical distribution board per the project plans and specifications;
8. Install two new 50-ton chillers per the project plans and specifications;
9. Install all new piping and electrical connections to make the new 50 -ton chillers fully operational per the plans and specifications;
10. Complete all other improvements as indicated per the plans and specifications. d. Location of the Project is 2560 Orion Way, Carlsbad. e. Work also includes: e.g., compliance with environmental requirements, cooperation with city’s construction manager; maintaining safe Work area throughout the construction period; traffic control if/as needed; and obtaining all permits needed to perform the indicated Work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
01 11 20 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
01 11 20 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
a. The Contract Price shall cover all Work required by the Contract Documents. All costs in connection with the proper and successful completion of the Work, including furnishing all materials, equipment, supplies, and appurtenances; providing all construction p lant, equipment, and tools; and performing all necessary labor and supervision to fully complete the Work, shall be included in the unit and lump sum Bid prices. All Work not specifically set forth as a pay item in the Bid Form shall be considered a subsidiary obligation of Contractor and all costs in connection the Work shall be included in the Bid prices. b. All estimated quantities stipulated in the Bid Form or other Contract Documents are approximate and are to be used only (a) as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the Work and (b) for the purpose of comparing the Bids submitted for the Work. The ac tual amounts of Work done and materials furnished under unit price items may differ from the estimated quantities. The basis of payment for Work and materials will be the actual amount of Work done and materials furnished. Contractor agrees that it will make no claim for damages, anticipated profits, or otherwise on account of any difference between the amounts of Work actually performed and materials actually furnished and the estimated amounts therefor.
c. Payment for each Bid Item shall be made in accordance with Sections 7 -2 and 7 -3 of the Agency Supplemental General Provisions and the Bid. All Work shown or described in the Contract Documents and necessary for the functioning of installed equipment or constructed facilities and the repair or replacement of damaged existing improvements in accordan ce with the Contract Documents shall be considered as included in the Bid Items.
1.02 BID ITEMS
a. Items listed on the Bid Schedule in Section 00 41 00 Bid Form shall be billed on a monthly basis.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
b. Informational Submittals:
1. Schedule of Values
2. Schedule of Estimated Progress Payments:
i. Submit with initially acceptable Schedule of Values. ii. Submit adjustments thereto with Application for Payment.
3. Application for Payment.
4. Final Application for Payment.
1.04 CASH ALLOWANCES – Not Used.
1.05 SCHEDULE OF VALUES (SOV)
a. Upon request of the Construction Manager, the Contractor shall provide documentation to support the accuracy of the SOV.
01 11 20 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
b. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer for review a SOV within the time specified in the Contract Documents.
c. When requested by the Engineer, the SOV shall divide each lump sum Bid item into its respective activities as listed in the Construction Schedule, and the sum of the costs apportioned to the activities comprising the Bid item shall equal the Bid item price . The Contractor shall add additional detail to the SOV when, in the opinion of the Engineer, such detail is necessary to represent the basis for payment. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a corrected Schedule of Values within 10 Calendar Days of the Engineer’s request.
d. The Contractor shall make adjustments to the approved SOV to account for Change Orders or Extra Work. The SOV entries for adjustments so made shall be approved by the Engineer.
e. The Contractor shall submit a revised SOV with each payment request. f. Payment for the preparation of or revisions to the SOV shall be included in the Contract Price and no additional payment will be made therefor.
g. Lump Sum Work:
1. Must reflect specified cash and contingency allowances and alternates, as applicable.
2. List bonds and insurance premiums, mobilization, demobilization, preliminary and detailed progress schedule preparation, equipment testing, facility startup, and Contract closeout separately.
i. Mobilization includes, at minimum, items identified in Section 01 50 00, Temporary Facilities and Controls.
3. Break down by Division 02 through 49 with appropriate subdivision of each specification for each Project facility.
h. An unbalanced or front-end loaded schedule will not be acceptable. i. Summation of the complete SOV representing all the Work shall equal the Contract Price. j. The Contractor shall submit SOV electronically in a spreadsheet format compatible with latest version of MS Excel.
1.06 SCHEDULE OF ESTIMATED PROGRESS PAYMENTS
a. Show estimated payment requests throughout Contract Times aggregating initial Contract Price.
b. Base estimated progress payments on initially acceptable progress schedule. Adjust to reflect subsequent adjustments in progress schedule and Contract Price as reflected by modifications to the Contract Documents.
01 11 20 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
1.07 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
a. Transmittal Summary Form: Attach 1 Summary Form with each detailed Application for Payment for each schedule and include Request for Payment of Materials and Equipment on Hand as applicable. Execute certification by authorized officer of Contractor. b. Use detailed Application for Payment Form provided by Construction Manager. c. Provide separate form for each schedule as applicable. d. Include accepted Schedule of Values for each schedule or portion of lump sum Work and the unit price breakdown for the Work to be paid on a unit priced basis. e. Include separate line item for each Change Order and Work Change Directive executed prior to date of submission. Provide further breakdown of such as requested by Construction Manager.
f. Preparation:
1. Round values to nearest dollar.
2. Submit Application for Payment, including a Transmittal Summary Form and detailed Application for Payment Form(s) for each schedule as applicable, a listing of materials on hand for each schedule as applicable, and such supporting data as may be requested by Construction Manager.
1.08 PAYMENT
a. Transmittal Summary Form: Attach 1 Summary Form with each detailed Application for Payment for each schedule and include Request for Payment of Materials and Equipment on Hand as applicable. Execute certification by authorized officer of Contractor. b. Each month, the Engineer will make an approximate measurement of the Work performed to the closure date as basis for making monthly progress payments. The estimated value will be based on Contract Unit Prices, completed Change Order Work.
Progress payments shall be made no later than 30 Calendar Days after the closure date.
Five Working Days following the closure date, the Engineer shall complete the detailed progress pay estimate and submit it to the Contractor for the Contractor’s information.
Should the Contractor assert that additional payment is due, the Contractor shall within 10 Calendar Days of receipt of the progress estimate, submit a supplemental payment request to the Engineer with adequate justification supporting the amount of supplemental payment request. Upon receipt of the supplemental payment request, the Engineer shall, as soon as practicable after receipt, determine whether the supplemental payment request is a proper payment request. If the Engineer determines that the supplemental payment request is not proper, then the request shall be returned to the Contractor as soon as pr acticable, but not later than 7 Calendar Days after receipt. The returned request shall be accompanied by a document setting forth in writing the reasons why the supplemental payment request was not proper. Consistent with Public Contract Code Section 20104.50, the Agency shall make payments within 30 Calendar Days after receipt of an undisputed and properly submitted supplemental payment request from the Contractor. If payment of the undisputed supplemental payment request is not made 01 11 20 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
within 30 Calendar Days after receipt by the Engineer, then the Agency shall pay interest to the Contractor equivalent to the legal rate set forth in subdivision (a) of Code of Civil Procedure Code Section 685.010.
c. After final inspection, the Engineer will make a Final Payment Estimate and process a corresponding payment. This estimate will be in writing and shall be for the total amount owed the Contractor as determined by the Engineer and shall be itemized by the Contract Bid item and Change Order item with quantities and payment amounts and shall show all deductions made or to be made for prior payments and amounts to be deducted under provisions of the Contract. All prior estimates and progress payments shall be s ubject to correction in the Final Payment Estimate.
d. The Contractor shall have 30 Calendar Days from receipt of the Final Payment Estimate to make a written statement disputing any Bid item or Change Order item quantity or payment amount. The Contractor shall provide all documentation at the time of submitting the statement supporting its position. Should the Contractor fail to submit the statement and supporting documentation within the time specified, the Contractor acknowledges that full and final payment has been made for all Contract Bid items and Change Order items.
e. If the Contractor submits a written statement with documentation in the aforementioned time, the Engineer will review the disputed item within 30 Calendar Days and make any appropriate adjustments on the Final Payment. Remaining disputed quantities or amounts not approved by the Engineer will be subject to resolution as specified in Section 2-10, Disputed Work.
f. The written statement filed by the Contractor shall be in sufficient detail to enable the Engineer to ascertain the basis and amount of the disputed items. The Engineer will consider the merits of the Contractor’s claims. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish within a reasonable time such further information and details as may be required by the Engineer to determine the facts or contentions involved in its claims. Failure to submit such information and details will be sufficient cause for denying payment for the disputed items.
1.09 MOBILIZATION (Not Used)
1.09 EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING
a. Except where otherwise specified, the unit or lump sum price Bid for each item of Work which involves excavation or trenching shall include all costs for such Work. No separate payment shall be made for excavation or trenching. All trenching shall be uncla ssified as to materials which may be encountered, and trenches shall be unclassified as to depth.
All excavation Work required for structures shall be unclassified as to materials which may be encountered; such excavation Work shall be considered to be a subsidiary obligation of Contractor and the cost of such excavation shall be included in the prices Bid for the structures.
01 11 20 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
1.01 PROCORE PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COLLABORATION SYSTEM a. This project may utilize the Owner’s Procore (www.procore.com) online project management and document control platform. The intent of utilizing Procore is to reduce cost and schedule risk, improve quality and safety, and maintain a healthy team dynamic by improving information flow, reducing non -productive activities, reducing rework and decreasing turnaround times. The Contractor is required to create a free web -based Procore user account(s) and utilize web-based training / tutorials (as needed) to become familiar with the system. Unless the Engineer approves otherwise, the Contractor shall process all project docum ents through Procore because this platform will be used to submit, track, distribute and collaborate on project. If unfamiliar or not otherwise trained with Procore, Contractor and applicable team members shall complete a free training certification cours e located at http://learn.procore.com/procore-certification- subcontractor. The Contractor is responsible for attaining their own Procore support, as needed, either through the online training or reaching out to the Procore support team.
It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to regularly check Procore and review updated documents as they are added. There will be no cost to the Contractor for use of Procore.
It is recommended that the Contractor provide mobile access for Windows, iOS located at https://apps.apple.com/us/app/procore-construction-management/id374930542 or Android devices located at
https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.procore.activities with the Procore App installed to at least one on -site individual to provide real -time access to current posted drawings, specifications, RFIs, submittals, schedules, change orders, project documents, as well as any deficient observations or punch list it ems. Providing mobile access will improve communication, efficiency, and productivity for all parties. The use of Procore for project management does not relieve the contractor of any other requirements as may be specified in the contract documents.
END OF SECTION
01 32 00 SUBMITTALS Date Printed: May 6, 2025
Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
01 32 00 SUBMITTALS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
a. Each submittal shall be consecutively numbered. Resubmittals shall be labeled with the original submittal number followed by an ascending alphabetical designation (e.g., ‘4 -A’ would indicate the first resubmittal of the fourth submittal). Each submittal shall be accompanied by a letter of transmittal on the Contractor’s letterhead which shall contain the following:
1. Agency Project title and Contract number.
2. Specification section number(s) pertaining to material submitted for review.
3. Submittal number.
4. Description of the contents of the submittal.
5. Identification of any deviation from the Contract Documents on the transmittal and by redline on the shop or working Drawings.
6. Contractor’s certification statement.
7. Printed name and signature of submitter, title and date. b. The Contractor shall place the following certification statements on all submittals and shall subscribe to one of the following:
"I certify that the materials, equipment or construction procedure(s) contained in this submittal meet all requirements shown or specified in the Contract Documents with no exceptions.”
Or
"I certify that the materials, equipment or construction procedure(s) contained in this submittal meet all requirements shown or specified in the Contract Documents, except for the following deviation(s):”
c. Shop Drawings and engineering data (submittals) covering all equipment and all fabricated components and building materials which will become a permanent part of the Goods and Special Services under this Contract shall be submitted to Engineer for review, as required. Submittals shall verify compliance with the Contract Documents, and shall include Drawings and descriptive information in sufficient detail to show the kind, size, arrangement, and the operation of component materials and devices; the external connections, anchorages, and supports required; the performance characteristics; and dimensions needed for installation and correlation with other materials and equipment. d. Each submittal shall cover items from only one section of the specification unless the item consists of components from several sources. Contractor shall submit a complete initial submittal including all components. When an item consists of components from several sources, Contractor's initial submittal shall be complete including all components. e. All submittals, regardless of origin, shall be approved by Contractor and clearly identified with the name and number of this Contract, Contractor's name, and references to 01 32 00 SUBMITTALS Date Printed: May 6, 2025
Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
applicable specification paragraphs and Contract Drawings. Each copy of all submittals, regardless of origin, shall be stamped or affixed with an approval statement of Contractor.
Each submittal shall indicate the intended use of the item in the Goods and Special Services. When catalog pages are submitted, applicable items shall be clearly identified and inapplicable data crossed out. The current revision, issue number, and date s hall be indicated on all Drawings and other descriptive data.
f. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the completeness of each submittal.
Contractor's stamp or affixed approval statement of a submittal, is a representation to Engineer that Contractor accepts sole responsibility for determining and verifying all quantities, dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data, and that Contractor has reviewed and coordinated each submittal with the requirements of the Goods and Special Services and the Contract Documents. g. All deviations from the Contract Documents shall be identified as deviations on each submittal and shall be tabulated in Contractor's letter of transmittal using Figure P-01300-
2. Such submittals shall, as pertinent to the deviation, indicate essential details of all changes proposed by Contractor (including modifications to other facilities that may be a result of the deviation) and all required piping and wiring diagrams. h. The Contractor shall submit shop Drawings electronically. All submittals shall be made with the selected method, and the Contractor shall inform the Engineer by letter 1 week after award of the Contract, which method has been selected. Submittals made by any method other than that selected by the Contractor, will be returned without review. i. Submittal documents shall be in black and white unless color is required for the review of the submittal. All electronic files shall be in PDF as generated by Adobe Acrobat Professional latest version. The PDF file(s) shall be fully indexed using the Table of Contents, searchable with thumbnails generated. PDF images must be at a readable resolution. For most documents, they should be scanned or generated at 300 dots per inch (dpi). Optical Character Recognition (OCR) capture must be performed on these images so that text can be searched, selected and copied from the generated PDF file.
The PDF documents shall have a bookmark created in the navigation frame for each major entry (“Section” or “Chapter”) in the Table of Contents. Thumbnails shall be generated for each page or graphic in the PDF file. The opening view for each PDF document shall be as follows:
1. Initial View: Bookmarks and Page
2. Magnification: Fit In Window
3. The file shall open to the Contractor’s transmittal letter, with bookmarks to the left. The first bookmark shall be linked to the Table of Contents.
PDF document properties shall include the submittal number for the document title and the Contractor’s name for the author.
j. Electronic submittal file sizes shall be limited to 10 MB. When multiple files are required for a submittal the least number of files possible shall be created. 01 32 00 SUBMITTALS Date Printed: May 6, 2025
Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
k. The Contractor shall post submittals and retrieve the Engineer’s submittal review comments through the Engineer’s (Consulting Engineer’s) Project website accessible through the Internet. Instruction on procedures for posting and retrieving submittals will be provided after award of the Contract.
l. Facsimiles (fax) will not be acceptable. Engineer will not accept submittals from anyone but Contractor. Submittals shall be consecutively numbered in direct sequence of submittal and without division by subcontracts or trades.
1.02 ENGINEER’S REVIEW OF SUBMITTALS
a. Engineer's review of submittals covers only general conformity to the Drawings and Specifications, external connections, and dimensions that affect the layout; it does not indicate thorough review of all dimensions, quantities, and details of the material, equipment, device, or item covered. Engineer's review shall not relieve Contractor of sole responsibility for errors, omissions, or deviations in the Drawings and data, nor of Contractor's sole responsibility for compliance with the Contract Documents. b. Engineer's submittal review period shall be 21 consecutive Calendar Days and shall commence on the first Calendar Day following receipt of the submittal or resubmittal in Engineer's office. The time required to mail the submittal or resubmittal back to Contractor shall not be considered a part of the submittal review period. c. When the Drawings and data are returned with review status "NOT ACCEPTABLE" or "RETURNED FOR CORRECTION," the corrections shall be made as instructed by Engineer.
If submittals are made in hard copy, 5 corrected copies shall be resubmitted. If submittals are made electronically, the corrected Drawings and data shall be resubmitted through the Project website. Resubmittals by facsimile or e -mail will not be accepted. When the Drawings and data are returned with review status "EXCEPTIONS NOTED ," "NO EXCEPTIONS NOTED," or "RECORD COPY," no additional copies need be furnished unless specifically requested by Engineer.
1.03 RESUBMITTAL OF DRAWINGS AND DATA
a. Contractor shall accept full responsibility for the completeness of each resubmittal.
Contractor shall verify that all corrected data and additional information previously requested by Engineer are provided on the resubmittal.
b. When corrected copies are resubmitted, Contractor shall direct specific attention to all revisions in writing and shall list separately any revisions made other than those called for by Engineer on previous submittals. Requirements specified for initial submittals shall also apply to resubmittals. Resubmittals shall bear the number of the first submittal followed by a letter (A, B, etc.) or a unique identification that indicates the initial submittal and correct sequence of each resubmittal.
c. If more than 1 resubmittal is required because of failure of Contractor to provide all previously requested corrected data or additional information, Contractor shall reimburse Agency for the charges of Engineer for review of the additional resubmittals. 01 32 00 SUBMITTALS Date Printed: May 6, 2025
Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
This does not include initial submittal data such as shop tests and field tests that are submitted after initial submittal.
d. Resubmittals shall be made within 30 Calendar Day of the date of the letter returning the material to be modified or corrected, unless within 14 Calendar Days Contractor submits an acceptable request for an extension of the stipulated time period, listing the reasons the resubmittal cannot be completed within that time.
e. The need for more than 1 resubmittal, or any other delay in obtaining Engineer's review of submittals, will not entitle Contractor to extension of the Contract Times unless delay of the Work is the direct result of a change in the Work authorized by a Change Order or failure of Engineer to review and return any submittal to Contractor within the specified review period.
1.04 COLOR SELECTION
a. Contractor shall submit samples of colors and finishes for all accepted products before Engineer will coordinate the selection of colors and finishes with Agency. Engineer will prepare a schedule of finishes that include the colors and finishes selected for both manufactured products and for surfaces to be field painted or finished and will furnish this schedule to Contractor within 60 Calendar Days after the date of acceptance of the last color or finish sample.
1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA AND MANUALS
a. Adequate operation and maintenance information shall be supplied for all equipment requiring maintenance or other attention. The equipment supplier shall prepare a Project specific operation and maintenance manual for each type of equipment indicated in the individual equipment sections or the equipment schedule. b. Parts lists and operating and maintenance instructions shall be furnished for other equipment not listed in the individual equipment sections or the equipment schedule. c. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following:
1. Equipment function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
2. Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking instructions.
3. Operating instructions for startup, routine and normal operation, regulation and control, shutdown, and emergency conditions.
4. Lubrication and maintenance instructions.
5. Guide to troubleshooting.
6. Parts lists and predicted life of parts subject to wear.
7. Outline, cross section, and assembly drawings; engineering data; and wiring diagrams.
8. Test data and performance curves, where applicable.
d. The operation and maintenance manuals shall be in addition to any instructions or parts lists packed with or attached to the equipment when delivered, or which may be required by Contractor.
01 32 00 SUBMITTALS Date Printed: May 6, 2025
Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
e. Manuals shall be submitted in electronic format to the Engineer prior to the date of shipment of the equipment. The manuals shall be submitted and the Engineer’s review comments retrieved, through the Project website accessible through the Internet.
Instruction on procedures for posting and retrieving O&M submittals and review comments will be provided after award of the Contract. When the O&M manuals are reviewed "RETURNED FOR CORRECTION,” the corrections shall be made as instructed by the Engineer or Consulting Engineer, and corrected manuals resubmitted to the Engineer or Consulting Engineer. Delivery of the final O&M shall be made 30 Calendar Days prior to placing the equipment in operation.
f. All material shall be marked with Project identification, and inapplicable information shall be marked out or deleted.
g. Shipment of equipment will not be considered complete until all required manuals and data have been received.
1.06 HARD COPY OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS – Not Used
1.07 ELECTRONIC OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
a. Electronic manuals shall be in Adobe Acrobat’s PDF, and shall be prepared at a resolution between 300 and 600 dpi, depending on document type. OCR capture shall be performed on these documents. OCR settings shall be performed with the “original image with hidden text” option in Adobe Acrobat Exchange.
b. File size shall be limited to 10 MB. When multiple files are required the least number of files possible shall be created. File names shall be in the format OMXXXXX -YYYZ-V.pdf, where XXXXX is the 5-digit number corresponding to the specification section, YYY is a 3- digit O&M manual number, e.g. , 001, Z is the letter signifying a resubmittal, A, B, C, etc, and V is a number used only when more than one 10 MB file is required for an O&M manual.
c. Documents prepared in PDF format shall be processed as follows:
d. Pages shall be searchable (processed for optical character recognition) and indexed when multiple files are required.
1. Of material to update the manual provided by the manufacturer. Pages shall be rotated for viewing in proper orientation.
2. A bookmark shall be provided in the navigation frame for each entry in the Table of Contents.
3. Embedded thumbnails shall be generated for each completed PDF file.
4. The opening view for PDF files shall be as follows:
5. Initial View: Bookmarks and Page
6. Page Number: Title Page (usually Page 1)
7. Magnification: Set to Fit in Window
8. Page: Single Page
9. Where the bookmark structure is longer than 1 page, the bookmarks shall be collapsed to show the chapter headings only.
01 32 00 SUBMITTALS Date Printed: May 6, 2025
Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
10. When multiple files are required the first file of the series (the parent file) shall list every major topic in the Table of Contents. The parent file shall also include minor headings bookmarked based on the Table of Contents. Major headings, whose content is contained in subsequent files (children) shall be linked to be called from the parent to the specific location in the child file. The child file shall contain bookmark entries for both major and minor headings contained in the child file.
The first bookmark of any child file shall link back to the parent file and shall read as follows "Return to the Equipment Name Table of Contents," e.g., Return to the Polymer Feed System Table of Contents.
11. Drawings shall be bookmarked individually.
12. Files shall be delivered without security settings to permit editing, insertion and deletion
1.08 LABELING
a. As a minimum, the following information shall be included on all final O&M manual materials, including CD-ROM disks, jewel cases, and hard copy manuals:
Equipment name and/or O&M title spelled out in complete words.
Project Name.
Agency Project/Contract Number.
Specification Section Number. Example: “Section 15 55 00” Manufacturer’s name.
File Name and Date.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
01 41 26 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS Date Printed: May 6, 2025
Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
01 33 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE (Not Used)
01 41 26 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
a. The Contractor is responsible to obtain all local, state and federal permits and licenses required to perform the Work. Payment for obtaining and complying with permits and licenses including, but not limited to, general construction permits, building perm its, grading permits, encroachment permits, haul route permits, excavation permits, drilling permits, water discharge permits, temporary easements, licenses, inspection fees, and Federal, State and local taxes shall be borne by the Contractor and shall be included in prices Bid for Work for which such costs are appurtenant. b. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all costs incurred for permits necessitated by its operations such as, but not limited to, permits required for sewage bypass pumping or discharge; Night Work; overload; blasting or demolition or for any permit related to the operation of equipment used in such Work.
c. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits for the disposal of all waste or surplus materials removed from the Project. The cost of the permit(s) shall be included in the price for the Bid items requiring the permits and no additional compensation will be allowed for them.
d. The Contractor shall provide a copy of the permit or license to the Agency prior to performing the Work requiring the permit or license.
e. Contractor shall pay for all fees applicable to Contractor’s operations. f. Contractor shall not begin Work until all permits applicable to the Work are obtained.
Permits shall be maintained in valid status until acceptance of the Work by the Agency. g. The Contractor shall pay all business taxes or license fees that are required for the Work.
1. To the extent that there is a change in the type or cost of any permits, fees, licenses, or inspections after Contract award, there shall be an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price on account of such change under the Extra Work provisions.
2. The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by Applicable Laws.
The Contractor is not entitled to damages or additional payment for delays attributable to the acquisition of permits.
3. The Contractor shall pay the Agency for regulatory fees, fines, or penalties imposed on the Agency arising from the Contractor’s failure to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
h. The Contractor shall obtain, pay for, and comply with required permits, licenses, work permits, and authorizations from appropriate agencies, including the following:
1. Licenses
01 41 26 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS Date Printed: May 6, 2025
Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
i. Before submitting Bids, Contractors shall be licensed in accordance with provisions of Chapter 9, Division 3, of the Business and Professions Code. ii. City of Carlsbad Business License.
2. State and Federal permits
i. Excavation and Dirt Moving Permit from Cal/OSHA
ii. Safety permit from California Division of Industrial Safety iii. NPDES General Permit for Storm Water Discharges Associated with Construction and Land Disturbance Activities (LUP Type 2) iv. NPDES Permit for discharge of hydrostatic test water and potable water
3. Other permits
i. City Haul Route Permit
ii. Traffic Control Plan Permit
iii. Grading Permit
iv. Right of Way Permit
v. Oversize Load Permit
vi. Blasting Permit
vii. Written authorization from private property owners for property utilized for staging
i. The Agency will obtain for the Contractor, the following:
1. Building Permit
2. CEQA Notice of Exemption
1.02 HAUL ROUTE PERMIT
a. The Contractor shall prepare a Project specific haul route plan detailing the streets intended for use in delivery of materials and import and export of soil. Contractor will be limited to the routes approved by the City of Carlsbad according to the approved haul route plan contained in the permit.
1.03 TRAFFIC CONTROL PLANS
a. The Contractor shall prepare Project specific traffic control plans, and haul route plan and use such plans to obtain a traffic control permit from the City of Carlsbad Development Services Department.
1.04 RAILROAD – Not Used
1.05 STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN (SWPPP)/ GENERAL PERMIT PROJECTS LESS THAN ONE ACRE (TIER 1 and TIER 2 or Maintenance ONLY Projects that may be over an acre)
A. Water Pollution Prevention. The Contractor shall plan for and implement temporary construction BMPs to mitigate the water quality impacts of land disturbance and non - storm water discharges related to construction activities in accordance the Agency’s current Municipal Stormwater Permit and Carlsbad Municipal Code Chapter 15.12. BMPs are the schedules of activities, prohibitions of practices, maintenance procedures and other management practices employed during construction activities to prevent or reduce pollution of bodies of water protected by the federal Clean Water Act (33 U.S.C. § 01 41 26 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS Date Printed: May 6, 2025
Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
1251 et seq. ) and the state Porter -Cologne Water Quality Control Act (Water Code , § 13000 et seq.), which include oceans, lagoons, lakes, streams and other sensitive water bodies and water courses. Construction BMPs also include physical devices and structural construction control measures designed to prevent soil erosion from occurring on the Work Site, or that are designed to prevent sediment from leaving the Work Site, both of which are referred to hereafter as “Water Pollution .” BMPs are also intended to protect the health, safety and welfare of the public and to prevent damage to adjoining public and private property resulting from construction activities.
B. Pollution prevention practices and the minimum BMPs are required during all 12 months of the year. BMPs and other erosion control practices must be implemented as the most important “first line of defense .” The Agency has adopted the CASQA ‘Stormwater Best Management Practices Handbook: Construction ,’ latest edition, as its preferred source for adopting construction BMPs. All BMPs must correspond to the BMP Fact Sheets included in the CASQA Construction Handbook. With the approval of the Engineer, or designee, the Agency may accept comparable BMPs fro m reputable alternative sources.
As used in this section, “Engineer” shall have the same meaning as “Construction Manager.”
C. The Contractor shall utilize the Agency’s Tier 1 or Tier 2 SWPPP templates and include all applicable elements provided in the template. The SWPPP templates are available on the Agency’s website at [PROJECT ENGINEER insert website address here]. Tier 1 and Tier 2 SWPPP templates include standard storm water prevention construction notes, a Project information block, a Storm Water Compliance Statement, Agency approval block and a BMP Checklist Table. The BMP Checklist Table is intended to help the Contractor select appropriate BMPs best suited to the Project and the Work. Additionally, the SWPPP shall include a Site plan showing the proposed Project Site and depicting the areas of proposed construction and proposed locations of construction BMPs. The Tier 1 and Tier 2 SWPPP plans shall be submitted as additional sheets to the construction plan set.
D. The Engineer may require Contractor to adopt additional BMPs if the Engineer determines the selected BMP(s) are ineffective or incapable of preventing Water Pollution from escaping the Work site. Tier 1 and Tier 2 SWPPPs must be combined with proper and timely installation of the BMPs, thorough and frequent inspections, maintenance, and documentation. The Contractor shall ensure that the selected BMPs are appropriately incorporated into the Site design and, if required by the Engineer, must employ a qualified professional to ensure proper installation and maintenance of the BMPs.
E. The Engineer may suspend the Work, consistent with Supplemental General Provisions Section 6 -6, at the Contractor’s cost, that create Water Pollution or otherwise violate water quality standards required by the federal Clean Water Act (33 U.S.C. § 1251 et seq.) and the state Porter-Cologne Water Quality Control Act (Water Code , § 13000 et seq.) if the Engineer determines that the Contractor has failed to satisfy all requirements of this section. If the Contractor violates any provisions of this subsection, or if Water Pollution occurs in the Work Site for any reason, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer.
01 41 26 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS Date Printed: May 6, 2025
Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
F. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Agency if there is a non-stormwater discharge to the storm drain conveyance system resulting from the Work or Project-related activities. In addition, the Contractor shall, within 24 hours, submit a written report to the Engineer describing the incident and corrective actions taken. If for any reason the Engineer detects Water Pollution, before notification by the Contra ctor, this written report shall also include an explanation of why the Contractor had not timely notified the Engineer.
G. Implementation Costs. Preparation, implementation and management of Water Pollution prevention activities are incidental to the items of Work and Agency shall not make additional payment to Contractor for these costs.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.05 SANITARY FACILITIES
Contractor shall furnish temporary sanitary facilities at the Site, as provided in the Contract, for the needs of all construction workers and others performing Work or furnishing services on the Project.
Sanitary facilities shall be of reasonable capacity, properly maintained throughout the construction period, and obscured from public view to the greatest practical extent. If toilets of the chemically treated type are used, at least 1 toilet will be furnished for each 20 persons.
Contractor shall enforce the use of such sanitary facilities by all personnel at the Site.
1.12 DAMAGE TO EXISTING PROPERTY
Contractor will be held responsible for any damage to existing structures, Work, materials, or equipment because of its operations and shall repair or replace any damaged structures, Work, materials, or equipment to the satisfaction of, and at no additional cost to, Agency.
Contractor shall protect all existing structures and property from damage and shall provide bracing, shoring, or other work necessary for such protection. (Optional Paragraph) Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to streets, roads, curbs, sidewalks, highways, shoulders, ditches, embankments, culverts, bridges, or other public or private property, which may be caused by transporting equipment, mater ials, or workers to or from the Work Site. Contractor shall make satisfactory and acceptable arrangements with the agency having jurisdiction over the damaged property concerning its repair or replacement.
1.13 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
All trees and other vegetation which must be removed to perform the Work shall be removed and disposed of by Contractor; however, no trees or cultured plants shall be unnecessarily removed unless their removal is indicated on the Drawings. All trees and plants not removed shall be protected against injury from construction operations.
Trees considered by Engineer to have any significant effect on construction operations are indicated on the Drawings and those which are to be preserved are so indicated.
Contractor shall take extra measures to protect trees designated to be preserved, such as erecting barricades, trimming to prevent damage from construction equipment, and installing pipe and other Work by means of hand excavation or tunneling methods. Such trees shall not be endangered by stockpiling excavated material or storing equipment against their trunks.
When injuring or removal of trees designated to be preserved cannot be avoided, or when removal and replacement is indicated on the Drawings, each tree injured beyond repair or removed shall be replaced with a similar tree of the nearest size possible. 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
All trimming, repair, and replacement of trees and plants shall be performed by qualified nursery workers or horticulturists.
1.14 SECURITY
Contractor shall be responsible for protection of the Site, and all Work, materials, equipment, and existing facilities thereon, against vandals and other unauthorized persons.
No claim shall be made against Agency by reason of any act of an employee or trespasser, and Contractor shall make good all damage to Agency’s property resulting from Contractor's failure to provide security measures as specified.
Security measures shall be at least equal to those usually provided by Agency’s to protect Agency’s existing facilities during normal operation, but shall also include such additional security fencing, barricades, lighting, watchman services, and other measures as required to protect the Site.
1.16 PARKING
Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable parking areas for the use of all workers and others performing Work or furnishing services in connection with the Project, as required to avoid any need for parking personal vehicles where they may interfere w ith public traffic, Agency’s operations, or construction activities.
XX
1.17 NOISE CONTROL
Contractor shall take reasonable measures to avoid unnecessary noise. Such measures shall be appropriate for the normal ambient sound levels in the area during working hours. All construction machinery and vehicles shall be equipped with practical sound -muffling devices, and operated in a manner to cause the least noise consistent with efficient performance of the Work.
During construction activities on or adjacent to occupied buildings, and when appropriate, Contractor shall erect screens or barriers effective in reducing noise in the building and shall conduct its operations to avoid unnecessary noise which might interf ere with the activities of building occupants.
XX
1.18 DUST CONTROL
Contractor shall take reasonable measures to prevent unnecessary dust. Earth surfaces subject to dusting shall be kept moist with water or by application of a chemical dust suppressant. When practicable, dusty materials in piles or in transit shall be covered to prevent blowing dust. 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Date Printed: May 6, 2025 Document Version: 1.0 Current Update: December 2023
Buildings or operating facilities which may be affected adversely by dust shall be adequately protected from dust. Existing or new machinery, motors, instrument panels, or similar equipment shall be protected by suitable dust screens. Proper ventilation shall be included with dust screens. xx
1.19 TEMPORARY DRAINAGE PROVISIONS
Contractor shall provide for the drainage of storm water and such water as may be applied or discharged on the Site in performance of the Work. Drainage facilities shall be adequate to prevent damage to the Work, the Site, and adjacent property.
Existing drainage channels and conduits shall be cleaned, enlarged, or supplemented as necessary to carry all increased runoff attributable to Contractor's operations. Dikes shall be constructed as necessary to divert increased runoff from entering adjacen t property (except in natural channels), to protect Agency’s facilities and the Work, and to direct water to drainage channels or conduits. Ponding shall be provided as necessary to prevent downstream flooding.
1.20 EROSION CONTROL
Contractor shall prevent erosion of soil on the Site and adjacent property resulting from its construction activities. Effective measures shall be initiated prior to the commencement of clearing, grading, excavation, or other operation that will disturb the natural protection.
Work shall be scheduled to expose areas subject to erosion for the shortest possible time, and natural vegetation shall be preserved to the greatest extent practicable. Temporary storage and construction buildings shall be located, and construction traffic routed, to minimize erosion.
Temporary fast-growing vegetation or other suitable ground cover shall be provided as necessary to control runoff.
1.21 POLLUTION CONTROL
Contractor shall prevent the pollution of drains and watercourses by sanitary wastes, sediment, debris, and other substances resulting from construction activities. No sanitary wastes shall be permitted to enter any drain or watercourse other than sanitary sewers. No sediment, debris, or other substance shall be permitted to enter sanitary sewers, and reasonable measures shall be taken to prevent such materials from entering any drain or watercourse. xx
END OF SECTION
PROJECT MANUAL
BIDDING AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
CARLSBAD POLICE AND FIRE
HEADQUARTERS CHILLER
REPLACEMENT
IDS Project #: 22X005.08
DATE: October 02, 2024
SIGNATURE AND STAMPS
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
CITY OF CARLSBAD – POLICE AND FIRE HEADQUARTERS- CHILLER REPLACEMENT
SIGNATURES AND STAMPS
Specifications for Project, City of Carlsbad – Police and Fire Headquarters – Chiller Replacement have been prepared under the direction of the following architects/engineers:
As to the general specifications and requirements:
As to Architectural portions:
10/02/2024
Signature and Date
As to Structural portions:
10/02/2024
Signature and Date
SIGNATURE AND STAMPS
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
As to Electrical engineering portions:
10/02/2024
Signature and Date
As to Mechanical engineering portions:
10/02/2024
Signature and Date
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - 1
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE
03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES
03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING
03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
22 14 13 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
22 14 23 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING
23 05 53 IDENTIFICATIONS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
23 09 23 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM
23 21 13 HYDRONIC PIPING
23 21 13.1 HYDRONIC VALVES & SPECIALTIES
23 64 23.13 AIR-COOLED WATER CHILLERS
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33.13 CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33.16 BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33.23 SURFACE RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 23 00 LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02 41 19 - 1
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
SECTION 02 41 19
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner.
C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.
D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Pre-demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.
B. Pre-demolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins.
C. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02 41 19 - 2
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.
C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.
D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.
1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Contractor as part of change order work before start of the work.
2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Contractor as part of the change order work before start of the work
E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.
1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02 41 19 - 3
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.
C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
D. Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage.
1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions.
B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor.
2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material.
c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.
e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02 41 19 - 4
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
C. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."
B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.
3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:
1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.
3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain[ fire watch and] portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.[ Comply with requirements in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."] B. Removed and Salvaged Items:
1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area indicated on Drawings.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
C. Removed and Reinstalled Items:
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02 41 19 - 5
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.
3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.
END OF SECTION 02 41 19
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
03 10 00 - 1
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
SECTION 03 10 00
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provisions of Division 01 apply to this section
B. Section Includes:
1. Formwork for cast-in-place concrete as indicated.
2. Installation of items to be embedded in concrete, such as anchor bolts, inserts, embeds, and sleeves.
C. Related Sections:
1. Section 032000: Concrete Reinforcing
2. Section 033000: Cast-In-Place Concrete
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Regulatory Requirements: Except as otherwise specified herein, Work of this section shall be in accordance with CBC, Chapter 19A, Concrete.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings indicating locations of forms, joints, embedded items, and accessories.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's Product Data for form materials and accessories.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the following as a minimum requirement:
1. Conform to ACI 347R-14 (or latest edition).
2. Plywood: Conform to tables for form design and strength in APA Form V 345.
B. Mock-ups: Provide mock-ups for architectural exposed finishes; 100 square feet minimum size. Locate as required by the Architect.
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
03 10 00 - 2
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Form materials may be reused during progress of the Work provided they are completely cleaned and reconditioned, recoated for each use, capable of producing formwork of required quality, and are structurally sound.
B. Form Lumber: WCLIB Construction Grade or Better, WWPA No. 1 or Better.
C. Plywood: PS 1-19, Group I, Exterior Grade B-B Plyform or better, minimum 5-ply and 3/4 inch thick for exposed locations and at least 5/8 inch thick for unexposed locations, grade marked, not mill oiled. Furnished plywood with medium or high density overlay is permitted.
D. Coated Form Plywood: For exposed painted concrete, plastic overlaid plywood of grade specified above, factory coated with a form coating and release agent Noxcrete", or equal.
E. Tube Forms: Burke "SmoothTube,” Sonoco "Seamless Sonotubes,” or Alton Building Products "Sleek Seamless Standard Wall,” of the type leaving no marks in concrete, one- piece lengths for required heights.
F. Joist Forms: Code recognized steel or molded plastic types as required.
G. Special Forms: For exposed integrally-colored concrete, plywood as above with high density overlay, plywood with integral structural hardboard facing or fibrous glass reinforced plastic facing, providing specified finish.
H. For Exposed Concrete Finish:
1. Plywood: New, waterproof, synthetic resin bonded, exterior type Douglas fir or Southern pine plywood manufactured especially for concrete formwork and conforming to NIST PS 1, BB grade, class I.
2. Glass-Fiber-Fabric Reinforced Plastic Forms: Matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to structural tolerances and appearance of finished concrete surfaces.
3. Steel: Minimum 16 gage sheet, well matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete, without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearances of finished concrete surfaces.
4. Plywood: "Finland Form,” or "Combi Form" distributed by North American Plywood Corporation. The material shall be furnished with hard smooth birch face veneers with phenolic resin thermally fused onto panel sides. Edges shall be factory sealed.
I. Form Ties: Prefabricated rod, flat band, wire, internally threaded disconnecting type, not leaving metal within 1-1/2 inch of concrete surface.
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
03 10 00 - 3
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
J. Form Coating: Non-staining clear coating free from oil, silicone, wax, not grain-raising, "Formshield" by A.C. Horn, Inc., "Release" by Burke Concrete Accessories, or "Cast-Off" by Sonneborn Building Products. Where form liners are furnished, provide form coatings recommended by form liner manufacturer.
K. Form Liner: Rigid or resilient type by L.M. Scofield, Labrado Forms, Symons, or Greenstreak
L. Void Forms: Manufactured by SureVoid Products, Inc, or equal. Forms shall be "WallVoid" for temporary support of concrete walls and grade beams spanning between supports, and "SlabVoid" for creating gaps between concrete slabs or steps and underlying soils. Void forms shall be fabricated of corrugated paper with moisture resistant exterior, and shall be capable of withstanding working load of 1,500 psf.
Provide accessories as required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Forms shall be constructed so as to shape final concrete structure conforming to shape, lines and dimensions of members required by Drawings and Specifications and shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar. They shall be properly braced or tied together to maintain position and shape. Forms and their supports shall be designed so that previously placed structures will not be damaged. Forms shall be true to line within the tolerances set forth in ACI 347 and ACI 117, whichever is stricter, unless otherwise directed by the Architect.
3.2 ERECTION
A. Plywood shall be installed with horizontal joints level, vertical joints plumb and with joints tight. Back joints by studs or solid blocking and fill where necessary for smoothness.
Reused plywood shall be thoroughly cleaned, damaged edges or surfaces repaired and both sides and edges oiled with colorless form oil. Nail plywood along edges, and to intermediate supports, with common wire nails spaced as necessary to maintain alignment and prevent warping.
B. Openings for Cleaning: Provide temporary openings at points in formwork to facilitate cleaning and inspection. At base of walls and wide piers, bottom form board on one face for entire length shall be omitted until form has been cleaned and inspected.
3.3 REMOVAL OF FORMS
A. Forms shall not be removed until concrete has sufficiently hydrated to maintain its integrity and not be damaged by form removal operations. The contractor shall remain fully and solely responsible for structure condition and integrity in relation to decisions regarding time of form removal. The preferred method of determining form removal time is the assessment of sufficient concrete strength based on tests of field cured specimens per 3.03B; however, at the contractor’s option and sole responsibility, the contractor may refer to Section 5.7 of ACI 347R-14 for minimum elapsed times and associated footnotes and provisions. Shoring shall not be removed until member has acquired sufficient strength to support its weight, load upon it, and added load of construction.
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
03 10 00 - 4
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
B. Compressive strength of in-place concrete shall be determined by testing field-cured specimens representative of concrete location or members, as specified in Section 033000: Cast-In-Place Concrete.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
3.5 CLEAN UP
A. Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
END OF SECTION 03 10 00
CONCRETE REINFORCING
32 20 00 - 1
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
SECTION 03 20 00
CONCRETE REINFORCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provisions of Division 01 apply to this section
B. Section Includes:
1. Concrete steel reinforcement as indicated.
C. Related Sections:
1. Section 031000: Concrete Forming and Accessories
2. Section 033000: Cast-In-Place Concrete
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Regulatory Requirements: Fabrication and placement of reinforcing shall be in accordance with requirements of CBC, Chapter 19A.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit steel reinforcement Shop Drawings in accordance with ACI 315.
Include assembly diagrams, bending charts and slab plans. Indicate lengths and location of splices, size and lengths of reinforcing steel. All reinforcement shop drawings shall be submitted in electronic format (PDF).
B. Closeout Submittals: Record exact locations of reinforcing that vary from Shop Drawings.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the following as a minimum requirement:
1. CBC, Chapter 19A, Concrete.
2. American Concrete Institute (ACI).
3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) Manual of Standard Practice.
4. American Welding Society (AWS).
CONCRETE REINFORCING
32 20 00 - 2
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
B. Source Quality Control: Refer to Division 01 Sections for general requirements and to following paragraphs for specific procedures. Testing laboratory retained by the Owner shall perform following conformance testing, select test Samples of bars, ties, and stirrups from the material at the Project site or from the place of distribution, with each Sample consisting of not less than two 18-inch long pieces, and perform the following tests according to ASTM A615.
1. Identified Bars: If Samples are obtained from bundles as delivered from the mill, identified as to heat number, accompanied by mill analyses and mill test reports, and properly tagged with the identification certificate so as to be readily identified, perform one tensile and one bend test for each 10 tons or fraction thereof of each size of bars. Submit mill reports when Samples are selected.
2. Unidentified Bars: When positive identification of reinforcing bars cannot be performed and when random Samples are obtained, perform tests for each 2.5 tons or fraction thereof, one tensile and one bend test from each size of bars.
C. Certification of Welders: Shop and Project site welding shall be performed by certified welding operators.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Avoid exposure to dirt, moisture or conditions harmful to reinforcing.
B. Reinforcing steel bars, wire, and wire fabric shall be stored on the Project site to permit easy access for examination and identification of each shipment. Material of each shipment shall be separated for size and shape.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide reinforcing of sizes, gages and lengths indicated, bent to indicated shapes.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, or ASTM A706 deformed grade 40 billet steel unless otherwise specified or indicated.
B. Deformed Bar Anchors: ASTM A1064.
C. Bars or Rod Mats: ASTM A184.
D. Wire Fabric for Reinforcement: ASTM A1064.
E. Tie Wire: ASTM A1064, fully annealed, copper-bearing steel wire, 16 gage minimum.
F. Chairs, Spacers, Supports, and Other Accessories: Standard manufacture conforming to ACI-315 fabricated from steel wire of required types and sizes. For reinforcement supported from grade, provide properly sized dense precast blocks of concrete.
CONCRETE REINFORCING
32 20 00 - 3
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
2.3 FABRICATION OF REINFORCING BARS:
A. Comply with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice for Reinforced Concrete Construction for fabrication of reinforcing steel.
B. Bending and Forming: Fabricate bars of the indicated sizes and bend and form to required shapes and lengths by methods not injurious to materials. Do not heat reinforcement for bending. Bend bars No. 6 size and larger in the shop only. Bars with unscheduled kinks or bends are not permitted. Provide only tested and permitted bar materials.
C. Welding: Provide only ASTM A706 steel where welding is indicated. Perform welding by the direct electric arc process in accordance with AWS D1.4 and specified low-hydrogen electrodes. Preheat 6 inches each side of joint. Protect joints from drafts during the cooling process; accelerated cooling is not permitted. Do not tack weld bars. Clean metal surfaces to be welded of loose scale and foreign material. Clean welds each time electrode is changed and chip burned edges before placing welds. When wire brushed, the completed welds must exhibit uniform section, smooth welded metal, feather edges without undercuts or overlays, freedom from porosity and clinkers, and good fusion and penetration into the base metal. Cut out welds or parts of welds deemed defective, using chisel, and replace with proper welding. Prequalification of welds shall be in accordance with CBC requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Bars shall be bent cold. Bars partially embedded in concrete shall not be field bent except as indicated on reviewed Shop Drawings. Before installation, clean reinforcing of loose scale, rust, oil, dirt and any coating that could reduce bond.
B. Accurately position, install, and secure reinforcing to prevent displacement during the placement of concrete.
C. Provide metal chairs to hold reinforcement the required distance above form bottoms. In beams and slab construction, provide chairs under top slab reinforcement as well as under bottom reinforcement. Space chairs so that reinforcement will not be displaced during installation. Provide metal spacers to secure proper spacing. Stirrups shall be accurately and securely wired to bars at both top and bottom. At slabs, footings, and beams in contact with earth, provide concrete blocks to support reinforcement at required distance above grade.
D. Install and secure reinforcement to maintain required clearance between parallel bars and between bars and forms. Lapped splices shall be installed wherever possible in a manner to provide required clearance between sets of bars. Stagger lapped splices.
Dowels and bars extending through construction joints shall be secured in position against displacement before concrete is installed and subsequently cleaned of concrete encrustations while they are still soft.
E. Do not install reinforcing in supported slabs and beams until walls and columns have been installed to underside of slabs and beams or until construction joints have been thoroughly cleaned. Reinforcing shall be inspected before placement of concrete and cleaned as required.
CONCRETE REINFORCING
32 20 00 - 4
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
F. Use deformed bars unless otherwise indicated, except for spiral reinforcement.
3.2 CLEAN UP
A. Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 03 20 00
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
32 30 00 - 1
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
SECTION 03 30 00
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provisions of Division 01 apply to this section
B. Section Includes:
1. Cast-in-place concrete placement and finishing.
C. Related Sections:
1. Section 031000: Concrete Forming and Accessories
2. Section 032000: Concrete Reinforcing
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating locations of cast-in-place concrete Work and accessory items such as vapor barriers. Include details and locations of reinforcing, embedded items, and interfacing with other Work. All shop drawing submittals shall be in electronic format (PDF).
B. Product Data:
1. Mix Design: Submit a concrete mix design for each mix that will be provided for the Work. Include water/cement ratio, size of coarse aggregate and amount of any admixture. Predict minimum compressive strength in accordance with the strength requirements shown in the drawings and/or specifications, maximum slump and air content percentage. Mix designs shall be prepared and stamped by a licensed California Civil Engineer. Mix design submittal shall be in electronic format (PDF).
2. Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete shall deliver to the project inspector a certificate with each mixer truck. Certificate shall bear the signature of representative of the testing laboratory, and shall state quantity of cement, water, fine and coarse aggregate and admixtures.
C. Material Samples: Submit Samples illustrating concrete finishes, minimum 12 inches x 12 inches in size.
D. Certificates: Submit a notarized certificate that each of following conforms to the latest standards indicated:
1. Aggregates – ASTM Standard C33
2. Admixtures - ASTM Standard C260
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
32 30 00 - 2
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
3. Curing materials - ASTM Standard C171
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the following as a minimum requirement.
B. California Building Code (CBC), applicable edition as determined by the governing regulatory authority.
C. American Concrete Institute (ACI) Publications, latest editions or as applicable as determined by the governing regulatory authority:
1. ACI 211 - Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions of Concrete.
2. ACI 304 - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete.
3. ACI 305 - Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting.
4. ACI 306 - Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting.
5. ACI 308 - Recommended Practice for Curing Concrete.
6. ACI 309 - Recommended Practice for Consolidation of Concrete.
7. ACI 318 – Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards, latest editions:
1. ASTM A 185 - Welded Steel Wire Fabric For Concrete Reinforcement.
2. ASTM C 31 - Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field.
3. ASTM C 33 - Concrete Aggregates.
4. ASTM C 39 - Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.
5. ASTM C 88 - Soundness of Aggregates by use of Sulphate or Magnesium Sulphate.
6. ASTM C 94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete.
7. ASTM C 143 - Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete.
8. ASTM C 150 - Portland Cement.
9. ASTM C 171 - Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.
10. ASTM C 172 - Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.
11. ASTM C 173 - Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
32 30 00 - 3
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
12. ASTM C 227 - Potential Alkali Reactivity of Cement-Aggregate Combinations (Mortar-Bar Method).
13. ASTM C 231 - Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method.
14. ASTM C 260 - Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
15. ASTM C 289 - Potential Reactivity of Aggregates (Chemical Method).
16. ASTM D 1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).
E. Continuous inspection shall be provided at the batch plant and for transit-mixed concrete to run check sieve analysis of aggregate, check moisture content of fine aggregate, check design of mix, check cement being used with test reports, check loading of mixer trucks, and certify to quantities of materials placed in each mixer truck.
F. Inspection shall be performed by a representative of a testing laboratory selected by the Owner. Owner will pay for inspection costs. Notify the laboratory 24 hours in advance of time concrete is to be mixed. Notify the laboratory of postponement or cancellation of mixing within at least 24 hours of scheduling time.
G. Continuous batch plant inspection requirement may be waived in accordance with the CBC.
Waiver shall be in writing.
H. Strength Test of Concrete: Refer to CBC 2022
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Mixing and Placing Concrete: Refer to CBC 2022.
B. Ready-mix concrete shall be mixed and delivered in accordance with ASTM C94, CBC and CBC Standards, as well as ACI 318. Each batch of concrete delivered to the project site shall be accompanied by a time slip bearing departure time and signature of batch plant supervisor. Concrete placement shall be completed, and concrete placed into its final position as shown on the drawings within 90 minutes after start of mixing. Start of mixing time and completion of concrete placement time shall be documented in writing for all concrete pours.
C. Store cement and aggregate materials so as to prevent their deterioration or intrusion by foreign matter. Deteriorated or contaminated materials shall not be furnished.
1.5 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Cold Weather Requirements:
1. Adequate equipment shall be provided for heating concrete materials and protecting concrete during freezing or near-freezing weather. Surfaces, in which concrete is to come in contact with, shall be free from frost or ice. No frozen materials or materials containing ice shall be furnished.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
32 30 00 - 4
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
2. When placing concrete during freezing or near-freezing weather the mix shall have a temperature of at least 50 degrees F., but not more than 90 degrees F. when cement is added. Concrete shall be maintained at a temperature of at least 50 degrees F. for at least 72 hours after placing or until it has thoroughly hydrated.
When necessary, concrete materials shall be heated before mixing. Special precautions shall be provided for protection of transit-mixed concrete.
B. Hot Weather Requirements:
1. During hot weather, proper attention shall be provided for ingredients, production methods, handling, placing, protection and curing, to prevent excessive concrete temperatures or water evaporation which could impair required strength or durability.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Mix and deliver in accordance with requirements of CBC.
B. Strength of Concrete: Concrete, unless otherwise indicated or specified, shall be provided with a minimum ultimate 28-day strength of 4,000 psi (f'c). For high-early-strength concrete, age for reaching the f'c shall be as indicated on Drawings.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C 150. Furnished cement shall be as selected and reviewed for concrete proportioning.
B. Aggregates: Aggregates shall conform to ASTM C 33 and C 227 except as modified herein.
Any suitable individual grading of coarse aggregate may be furnished, provided such grading results in a mix that conforms to all requirements of this specification and the drawings. The gradings shown below are typical industry values for maximum aggregate sizes from ¾” to 1-1/2”. Since this project limits maximum aggregate size to 1”, the 1-1/2” gradation information does not apply. If a smaller maximum aggregate size is used, for example 3/8”, the contractor shall submit an appropriate gradation.
GRADING OF COMBINED AGGREGATE
Sieve Number or 1-1/2" 1" 3/4"
Size in Inches Maximum Maximum Maximum
Passing a 2" ------ ------ ------
Passing a 1-1/2" 95-100 ------ ------
Passing a 1" 70-90 90-100 ------
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
32 30 00 - 5
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
Passing a 3/4" 50-80 70-95 90-100
Passing a 3/8" 40-60 45-70 55-75
Passing a No. 4 35-55 35-55 40-60
Passing a No. 8 25-40 27-45 30-46
Passing a No. 16 16-34 20-38 23-40
Passing a No. 30 12-25 12-27 13-28
Passing a No. 50 2-12 5-15 5-15
Passing a No. 100 0-3 0-5 0-5
C. Water: Water shall be potable and free from deleterious matter.
D. Admixtures: ACI 318, Section 3.6.
E. Expansion Joint Fillers: Preformed strips, non-extruding and resilient bituminous type, of thickness indicated, conforming to ASTM D1751.
F. Curing Paper and Liquid Curing Compounds:
1. Curing Paper: A standard brand conforming to ASTM C171, Type 1 - Regular.
2. Liquid Curing Compounds: A standard brand, clear liquid conforming to ASTM C309, Master Builders, Grace, Antihydro.
G. Abrasive Aggregate: Norton Alundum, Union Carbide Carborundum, or equal, graded #12 through #30 sizes, color as selected by Architect.
H. Underlayment: Latex underlayment for filling low spots in concrete shall be Tile-Tex by Flintkote Co., Webtex #60 or Fixallatex by Dowman Products Co.
I. Vapor Barrier: ASTM D21O3, polyethylene sheeting, clear, 10 mils minimum thickness, impact strength greater than 70 grams per mil, 10 feet minimum width. Provide minimum 2- inch wide waterproof plastic self-adhering tape for sealing edges and ends of sheeting.
1. Moisture barrier is required where an interior area is scheduled to receive moisture sensitive floor finishes.
J. Stair Strips and Nosing:
1. Fabricated from 6063-T5 extruded aluminum, mill finish. Anti-slip filler shall contain at least 60 percent virgin grain aluminum oxide abrasive. Binder shall be fully cured resilient type epoxy, with binder-to-filler ratio of 13 percent. The epoxy-abrasive filler shall extend over the curved front edge of the nosing and shall be securely bonded to the extruded aluminum base.
2. Manufactured by Wooster Products Inc. American Safety Tread Co. Inc., or equal.
3. Nosing and strips for concrete casting shall be provided with Sure-Hold anchors, chevron shaped continuous full length of nosing or strip.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
32 30 00 - 6
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
4. Nosings and anchors for attachment to hydrated concrete stairs and wood stairs shall be similar to those specified below, except they shall be provided with countersunk holes for screws and fasteners.
5. Colors: As selected by Architect to contrast with stair color. Colors shall extend uniformly through the filler.
6. Strip and Nosing Types:
a. Nosings for sloped riser steel pan stairs: Type WP4J, 4-1/16 inches wide, 3/8 inch thick.
b. Nosings for new concrete stairs: Type WP4C, 4-1/16 inches wide, 3/8 inch thick, nose projects down 1/4 inch.
c. Nosings for square edged steel pan stairs: Type WP4SP, 4-1/16 inches wide, 3/8 inch thick nose.
d. Strips for recessing into concrete stairs: Type WP1A, except 2-1/4 inches wide, 3/8 inch thick. American Safety Tread Co., Type 24, or equal.
e. Strips for adhering to existing or hydrated concrete: Flex-Tred anti-safety strips, minimum 2-1/4 inches wide. Cut from rolls and round corners.
f. Strips for anchoring into wood or stone: American Safety Tread Co., Type 24H, or equal, with holes for fasteners, 2-1/4 inches wide.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Time of Placing: Do not place concrete until reinforcement, conduits, outlet boxes, anchors, hangers, sleeves, bolts, and other embedded materials are securely fastened in place.
Contact the inspector at least 24 hours before placing concrete; do not place concrete until inspected and approved.
B. Pouring Record: A record shall be kept on the Project site of time and date of placing concrete in each portion of structure. Such record shall be maintained on the roject site until substantial completion and shall be available for examination by all project team members, including the design team, inspectors and Owner.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Moisture Barrier: Before installation of screeds and slab reinforcement, install a moisture barrier under slabs on grade. Place membrane in as large sheets as possible, lapped 12 inches at sides and ends, with top lap placed in the direction of the spreading of concrete.
Extend membrane and lap at least 4 inches onto adjoining wall surfaces and seal with pressure-sensitive tape.
1. Install moisture barrier on minimum 2-inch bed of sand, unless otherwise indicated, over gravel base as indicated on the Drawings.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
32 30 00 - 7
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
2. Patch punctures and tears in moisture barrier.
B. Reglets and Rebates:
1. Form reglets and rebates in concrete to receive flashing, frames and other equipment as detailed and required. Coordinate dimensions and locations required with other related Work.
2. If concrete slabs on grade adjoin a wall or other perpendicular concrete surface, form a reglet in wall to receive and carry horizontal concrete Work. Reglet shall be full thickness of the slab and shall be 3/4 inch wide, unless otherwise indicated.
Requirement does not apply to exterior walks, unless specifically indicated.
C. Anchor Slots: Dove-tail anchor slots at concrete walls to receive masonry veneer shall be set vertically in forms, 24 inches maximum on centers measured horizontally. Anchor slots shall be No. 24 gage galvanized sheet steel with removable fiber filler to prevent seepage of cement in slot.
D. Screeds: Install screeds accurately and maintain at required grade or slab elevations after steel reinforcement has been installed, but before starting to place concrete. Install screeds adjacent to walls and in parallel rows not to exceed 8 feet on centers.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Conveying and Placing:
1. Concrete shall be placed only under direct observation of the project inspector. Do not place concrete outside of regular working hours unless the project inspector has been notified at least 48 hours in advance.
2. Concrete shall be conveyed from mixer to location of final placement by methods which will prevent separation or loss of materials.
3. Concrete shall be placed as nearly as practicable to its final position to avoid segregation due to re-handling or flowing. No concrete that has partially hydrated or has been contaminated by foreign materials shall be placed, nor shall re-tempered concrete or concrete which has been remixed after initial set be placed.
4. In placing concrete in columns, walls or thin sections, provide openings in forms, elephant trunks, tremies or other recognized devices, to prevent segregation and accumulation of partially hydrated concrete on forms or metal reinforcement above level of concrete being placed. Such devices shall be installed so that concrete will be dropped vertically. Unconfined vertical drop of concrete from end of such devices to final placement surface shall not exceed 6 feet.
5. Concrete shall be placed as a continuous operation until placing of panel or section is completed. Top surfaces of vertically formed lifts shall be level unless noted otherwise on the drawings.
6. Concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated during placement, and shall be worked around reinforcement and embedded fixtures with mechanical vibrators.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
32 30 00 - 8
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
7. Where conditions make consolidation difficult, or where reinforcement is congested, batches of mortar containing same proportions of cement, sand, and water as provided in the concrete, shall first be deposited in the forms to a depth of at least one inch.
B. Compaction and Screeding:
1. Tamp freshly placed concrete with a heavy tamper until at least 3/8 inch of mortar is brought to surface. Concrete shall then be tamped with a light tamper and screeded with a heavy straightedge until depressions and irregularities are eliminated, and surface is true to finish grades or elevations. Remove excess water and debris.
2. Where slabs are to receive separate cement finish or mortar setting bed, continued tamping to raise mortar to surface is not performed. Laitance shall be removed by brushing with a stiff brush or by light sandblasting to expose clean top surface of coarse aggregate.
C. Floating and Troweling:
1. When concrete has hydrated sufficiently, it shall be floated to a compact and smooth surface. After floating, wait until concrete has reached proper consistency before troweling. Top surfaces shall receive at least 2 troweling operations with steel hand trowel. Prior to and during final troweling, apply a fine mist of water frequently with an atomizing type fog sprayer. Omit troweling for slabs to receive a separate cement finish.
2. For interior finish slabs, final troweling shall provide a hard, impervious, and non-slip surfaces, free from defects and blemishes. Finished surface shall be within a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. Avoid burnishing. Do not add cement or sand to absorb excess moisture.
3. Exterior Paving and Cement Walks: Finish as specified above, except surface shall be given a non-slip broom finish to match Sample reviewed by the Architect.
4. Vertical concrete surfaces shall be finished smooth and free from marks or other surface defects.
D. Curing:
1. Concrete shall be maintained above 50 degrees F., and in a moist condition for 7 days after placing, except that high early strength concrete shall be maintained in a moist condition for 3 days.
2. Before applying curing paper, interior floor treated with colored hardener shall be given a heavy protective coat of colored wax left unpolished, and then immediately covered with paper. If wax is not applied within two hours after final troweling, concrete shall be sprayed with a fine water mist and maintained continuously moist until wax is applied, unless spraying is not recommended by hardener manufacturer. After other Work such as plastering and painting has been completed, curing paper shall be removed and waxed floors cleaned of protective wax coating.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
32 30 00 - 9
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
3. Forms containing concrete, top of concrete between forms, and exposed concrete surfaces after removal of forms shall be maintained in a thoroughly wet condition for at least 7 consecutive days after placing.
4. If weather is hot or surface has dried out, spray surface of concrete slabs and paving with fine mist of water, starting not later than 2 hours after final troweling and continuing until sunset. Surface of finish shall be kept continuously wet until curing medium has been installed.
5. Immediately after finishing, roof slabs and monolithic floor finish to receive resilient floor covering shall be uniformly and completely coated with liquid curing compound.
a. Install compound in a manner and quantity sufficient to produce a uniform continuous thin film of water-impervious membrane. Compound shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
b. Protect adjoining surfaces from damage during installation. If curing compound is not applied immediately, cover finished concrete with wet burlap or curing paper and keep concrete surface wet for a period not to exceed thirty hours following finishing of concrete. At end of that time, burlap or paper shall be removed and curing compound installed as specified above.
5. Immediately after finishing, monolithic floor slabs not scheduled to receive resilient floor covering shall be covered with curing paper. Paper shall be lapped 3 inches at joints and sealed with waterproof sealer. Edges shall be cemented to finish. Repair or replace paper damaged during construction operations.
6. Within 24 hours after finishing, exterior slabs and paving, and interior slabs to receive cement topping or mortar setting beds, shall be covered with sand to a depth of 2 inches and kept thoroughly wet for 7 days.
a. Instead of sand covering, exterior walks and paving where no other surface treatment is specified, may be cured with clear liquid curing compound immediately installed in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
E. Filling, Leveling and Patching:
1. Concrete slabs exhibiting high or low spots and indicated to receive resilient floor covering or soft floor covering, shall have surfaces repaired. High spots shall be honed, or ground with power-driven machines to required tolerances. Low spots shall be filled with latex underlayment, installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations.
2. Holes resulting from form ties or sleeve nuts shall be solidly packed, through exterior walls, by pressure grouting with cement grout, as specified. Grouted holes on exposed surfaces shall be screeded flush and finished to match adjoining surfaces.
F. Cement Base: Cement base shall be of the height, thickness, and shape detailed. Base shall be reinforced with one inch mesh, 18 gage, zinc-coated wire fabric. Base finish mixture shall be one part Portland cement, 2 parts of fine aggregate and one part pea gravel. Colored cement base shall include a chemically inert mineral oxide pigment in the mix.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
32 30 00 - 10
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
3.4 FINISHING
A. Soda and Acid Wash: Concrete surfaces to receive plaster, paint or other finish, and which have been formed by oil coated forms, shall be scrubbed with a solution of 1-1/2 pounds of caustic soda to one gallon of water. Surfaces where smooth wood or waste molds have been furnished shall be scrubbed with a solution of 20 percent muriatic acid. Wash with clean water after scrubbing.
B. Sacking: Exposed concrete curbs, walls, and other surfaces shall be sacked by an application of Portland cement grout, floated, and rubbed. Sacking shall not be performed until patching and filling of holes has been completed. Entire sacking operation for any continuous area shall be started and completed within the same day.
1. Mix one part Portland cement and 1-1/2 parts fine sand with sufficient water to produce a grout having consistency of thick paint. Wet surface of concrete sufficiently to prevent absorption of water from grout. Apply grout uniformly with a brush or spray gun, then immediately float surface with a cork or other suitable float, scouring wall vigorously.
2. While grout is still plastic, finish surface with a sponge-rubber float, removing excess grout. Allow surface to dry thoroughly, then rub vigorously with dry burlap to completely remove dried grout. No visible film or grout shall remain after rubbing with burlap.
C. Sandblasting: Exterior concrete surfaces to receive stucco dash coat finish, where plywood or other smooth forms have been furnished, shall be uniformly sand-blasted with sharp quartz sand under sufficient air pressure to remove dirt, form oil and other foreign materials, and roughen surface to provide a proper bond. Such surfaces shall be thoroughly washed with clean water after sandblasting.
D. Abrasive: Concrete stair treads, landings, ramps and steps on interior and exterior of buildings, and interior exposed concrete floors in shop buildings shall receive an abrasive finish. Abrasive grains in amount of 30 pounds per 100 square feet shall be evenly installed by dust-on method and embedded into surface during first troweling operation. Additional abrasive grains, in amount of 30 pounds per 100 square feet, shall then be evenly installed and embedded into surface during final troweling operation.
E. Floor Hardener: Exposed interior concrete floors throughout shall be treated with floor hardener, as specified. Install hardener after surface of concrete has reached the point where no excess moisture is present, but while it is still plastic. Hardener shall be installed as follows:
1. Colored Hardener: Install at rate of 40 pounds per 100 square feet of surface for initial application.
2. Gray (natural) Hardener: Install at rate of 20 pounds per 100 square feet of surface for initial application.
3. Hardener shall be evenly distributed and thoroughly floated into surface mortar with a wood float. An additional 20 pounds of hardener, colored or gray, specified as above, shall be installed over each 100 square feet, and troweled to an even surface having uniform color and texture.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
32 30 00 - 11
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
F. Cement Grout and Dry-Pack Concrete: Cement grout shall be mixed at the Project site and shall be composed of one volume of Portland cement and 2-1/2 volumes of fine aggregate.
Materials shall be mixed dry with sufficient water added to make mixture flow under its own weight. When grout is used as a dry pack concrete, add sufficient water to provide a stiff mixture, which can be molded into a sphere.
G. Broom Finish: Exterior stair treads and landings shall be provided with a non-slip broom finish in addition to abrasive finish specified.
H. Abrasive Stair Nosing: Nosing shall be installed according to manufacturers written recommendations.
3.5 EXPANSION AND CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
A. Construction Joints: Details and proposed location of construction joints shall be as indicated on the Drawings, located to least impair strength of structure, in accordance with the following:
1. Thoroughly clean contact surface by sand blasting entire surface not earlier than 5 days after initial placement.
2. A mix containing same proportion of sand and cement provided in concrete plus a maximum of 50 percent of coarse aggregate shall be placed to a depth of at least one inch on horizontal joints. Vertical joints shall be wetted and coated with a neat cement grout immediately before placing of new concrete.
3. Should contact surface become coated with earth, sawdust, or deleterious material of any kind after being cleaned, entire surface shall be re-cleaned before applying mix.
B. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints where indicated in walks and exterior slabs.
Space approximately 20 feet apart, unless otherwise indicated. Joints shall extend entirely through slab with joint filler in one piece for width of walk or slab. Joint filler shall be 3/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Tooled Joints: Slabs, walks and paving shall be marked into areas as indicated with markings made with a V-grooving tool. Marks shall be round-edged, free from burrs or obstructions, with clean cut angles and shall be straight and true. Walks, if not indicated, shall be marked off into rectangles of not more than 12 square feet and shall have a center marking where more than 5 feet wide.
3.6 TESTING
A. Molded Cylinder Tests:
1. Owner Consultant will prepare cylinders. Each cylinder shall be dated, given a number, point in structure from which sample was obtained, mix design number, mix design strength and result of accompanying slump test noted.
2. Separate tests of molded concrete cylinders obtained at same place and time shall be made at age of 3 days, 7 days, and 28 days. A strength test shall be the average
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
32 30 00 - 12
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
of the compressive strength of 2 cylinders, obtained from the same sample of concrete and tested at 28 days or at test age designated for determination of f'c.
3. Test cylinders shall be prepared at the Project site and stored in testing laboratory in accordance with ASTM C 31 and tested in accordance with ASTM C 39.
B. Core Test: At request of the Architect, cores of hardened concrete shall be cut from portions of hydrated structures for testing, in accordance with CBC and ASTM C 42.
1. Provide 4-inch diameter cores at representative places throughout the structure as designated by the Architect.
2. In general, provide sufficient cores to represent concrete placed with at least one core for each 4,000 square feet of building area, and at least 3 cores total for each Project.
3. Where cores have been removed, fill voids with drypack, and patch the finish to match the adjacent existing surfaces.
C. Concrete Consistency: Measure consistency according to ASTM C143. Test twice each day or partial day's run of the mixer.
D. Adjustment of Mix: If the strength of any grade of concrete for any portion of Work, as indicated by molded test cylinders, fall below minimum 28 days compressive strength specified or indicated, adjust mix design for remaining portion of construction so that resulting concrete meets minimum strength requirements.
E. Defective Concrete:
1. Should strength of any grade of concrete, for any portion of Work indicated by tests of molded cylinders and core tests, fall below minimum 28 days strength specified or indicated, concrete will be deemed defective Work and shall be replaced or adequately strengthened in a manner acceptable to the Architect and SEOR.
2. Concrete Work that is not formed as indicated, is not true within 1/250 of span, not true to intended alignment, not plumb or level where so intended, not true to intended grades and levels, contains sawdust shavings, wood or embedded debris, or does not fully conform to Contract provisions, shall be deemed to be defective Work and shall be removed and replaced.
F. Concrete For Equipment Pads, Mechanical and Electrical Work: Unless otherwise indicated, strength shall be 4,000 psi concrete. Exposed concrete shall be provided with a hand trowel finish with radius corners and edges. Form and place concrete where necessary as described in Section 031000: Concrete Forming and Accessories and reinforced as described in Section 032000: Concrete Reinforcing. Calcium chloride shall not be furnished in any concrete mix provided for the installation of underground electrical conduits. For concrete encasement of more than one conduit, furnish 3/4 inch to 1 inch aggregate as specified for concrete mix.
3.7 CLEAN UP
A. Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
32 30 00 - 13
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 03 30 00
FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
22 14 13 - 1
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
SECTION 22 14 13
FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.
2. Specialty pipe fittings.
B. Related Section:
1. Section 33 41 00 "Storm Utility Drainage Piping" for storm drainage piping outside the building.
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For storm drainage piping, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
B. Field quality-control reports.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
2.02 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company.
2. GF Piping Systems.
3. JM Eagle.
FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
22 14 13 - 2
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
B. NSF Marking: Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF -drain" for plastic storm drain and "NSF-sewer" for plastic storm sewer piping.
C. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665; drain, waste, and vent.
D. Cellular-Core PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Schedule 40.
E. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.
F. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.
G. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.
2.03 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS
A. Transition Couplings:
1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in OD's or of different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined.
2. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified- piping-system fitting.
3. Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1) Fernco Inc.
2) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. 3) Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies, Inc. b. Standard: ASTM C 1173.
c. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
d. Sleeve Materials:
1) For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber.
4. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
b. Standard: ASTM C 1460.
c. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
22 14 13 - 3
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations from layout are approved on coordination drawings.
B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
E. Install piping at indicated slopes.
F. Install piping free of sags and bends.
G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
H. Make changes in direction for storm drainage piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long -sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected.
Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
I. Lay buried building storm drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.
J. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated:
1. Building Storm Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger.
2. Horizontal Storm-Drainage Piping: 1 percent downward in direction of flow.
K. Install PVC soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
L. Plumbing Specialties:
1. Install backwater valves in storm drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Section 22 14 23 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties."
FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
22 14 13 - 4
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
2. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building storm sewers in storm drainage gravity-flow piping. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in storm drainage force-main piping. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Section 22 14 23 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties."
3. Install drains in storm drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Section 22 14 23 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties." M. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
N. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 22 05 17 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
O. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 22 05 17 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
P. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 22 05 18 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."
3.02 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join hubless, cast -iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints.
B. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Torque bolts in cross pattern.
3.03 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Transition Couplings:
1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in OD's.
2. In Drainage Piping: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.
3.04 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to backflow.
1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type unless otherwise indicated.
2. Install backwater valves in accessible locations.
3. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Section 22 14 23 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties."
FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
22 14 13 - 5
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
3.05 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements for seismic -restraint devices specified in Section 22 05 48 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Section 22 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments.
2. Install stainless-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in corrosive environments.
3. Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments.
4. Install stainless-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in corrosive environments.
5. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
6. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:
a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m) if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
7. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
8. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
C. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches (300 mm) of each fitting and coupling.
D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
E. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double -rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum rods.
F. Install hangers for cast -iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:
a. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
b. NPS 3 (DN 80): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. c. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 5/8-inch (16- mm) rod.
d. NPS 6 and NPS 8 (DN 150 and DN 200): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/4-inch (19- mm) rod.
G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).
3.06 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.
FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
22 14 13 - 6
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties.
1. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor, and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor.
2. Install horizontal backwater valves with cleanout cover flush with floor.
3. Comply with requirements for backwater valves cleanouts and drains specified in Section 22 14 23 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties."
D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment.
3.07 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify exposed storm drainage piping. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 22 05 53 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in.
2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drainage piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.
3. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water (30 kPa). From 15 minutes before inspection starts until completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.
4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.
5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
22 14 13 - 7
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
3.09 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
3.10 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated.
B. Underground storm drainage piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and smaller shall be the following:
1. PVC soil pipe and fittings; CISPI, hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints.
2. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.
END OF SECTION
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 14 23 - 1
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
SECTION 22 14 23
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Roof drains.
2. Miscellaneous storm drainage piping specialties.
3. Cleanouts.
4. Through-penetration fire stop assemblies.
5. Flashing materials.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL ROOF DRAINS
A. Cast-Iron, Large-Sump, General-Purpose Roof Drains:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements:
a. Josam Company.
b. MIFAB, Inc.
c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
d. Tyler Pipe.
e. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2. Standard: ASME A112.6.4, for general-purpose roof drains.
3. Body Material: Cast iron.
4. Dimension of Body: Nominal 15-inch diameter.
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 14 23 - 2
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
5. Combination Flashing Ring and Gravel Stop: Required.
6. Flow-Control Weirs: Not required.
7. Outlet: Bottom.
8. Extension Collars: Not required.
9. Underdeck Clamp: Required.
10. Expansion Joint: Not required.
11. Sump Receiver Plate: Required.
12. Dome Material: Cast iron.
13. Perforated Gravel Guard: Stainless steel.
14. Vandal-Proof Dome: Required.
15. Water Dam: 2 inches high.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Downspout Adaptors:
1. Description: Manufactured, gray-iron casting, for attaching to horizontal-outlet, parapet roof drain and to exterior, sheet metal downspout.
2. Size: Inlet size to match parapet drain outlet.
B. Downspout Boots:
1. Description: Manufactured, ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron casting, with strap or ears for attaching to building; NPS 4 outlet; and shop-applied bituminous coating.
2. Size: Inlet size to match downspout and NPS 4 outlet.
C. Conductor Nozzles:
1. Description: Bronze body with threaded inlet and bronze wall flange with mounting holes.
2. Size: Same as connected conductor.
3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements:
a. Josam Company.
b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
c. Tyler Pipe.
d. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Products Operation. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2.3 CLEANOUTS
A. Floor Cleanouts:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements:
a. Josam Company.
b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
c. Tyler Pipe.
d. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Products Operation. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M, for adjustable housing cleanouts.
3. Size: Same as connected branch.
4. Type: Adjustable housing.
5. Body or Ferrule Material: Cast iron.
6. Clamping Device: Not required.
7. Outlet Connection: Spigot.
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 14 23 - 3
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
8. Closure: Brass plug with tapered threads.
9. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads.
10. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy.
11. Frame and Cover Shape: Round.
12. Top-Loading Classification: Heavy Duty.
13. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout.
B. Test Tees:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Josam Company.
b. MIFAB, Inc.
c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
d. Tyler Pipe.
e. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M and ASTM A 74, ASTM A 888, or CISPI 301, for cleanout test tees.
3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.
4. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil-pipe T-branch or hubless, cast-iron soil- pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.
5. Closure Plug: raised head.
6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
C. Wall Cleanouts:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Josam Company.
b. MIFAB, Inc.
c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
d. Tyler Pipe.
e. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation
2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M, for cleanouts. Include wall access.
3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.
4. Body Material: Hubless, cast-iron soil-pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.
5. Closure: Raised-head, plug.
6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
7. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with screw.
8. Wall Access: Round, nickel-bronze, copper-alloy, or stainless-steel wall-installation frame and cover.
2.4 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES
A. Through-Penetration Fire stop Assemblies:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. ProSet Systems Inc.
2. Standard: ASTM E 814, for through-penetration firestop assemblies.
3. Certification and Listing: Intertek Testing Service NA for through-penetration firestop assemblies.
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 14 23 - 4
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
4. Size: Same as connected pipe.
5. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
6. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye branch with neoprene O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include PVC protective cap for plug.
7. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings.
2.5 FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M,12 oz./sq. ft.
B. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04- inch minimum thickness unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot-dip galvanized, mill- phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.
C. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil minimum thickness.
D. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.
E. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.
F. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's written installation instructions.
1. Install flashing collar or flange of roof drain to prevent leakage between drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
2. Install expansion joints, if indicated, in roof drain outlets.
3. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.
B. Install downspout adapters on outlet of back-outlet parapet roof drains and connect to sheet metal downspouts.
C. Install downspout boots at grade with top 12 inches above grade. Secure to building wall.
D. Install conductor nozzles at exposed bottom of conductors where they spill onto grade.
E. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following instructions unless otherwise indicated:
1. Use cleanouts the same size as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate cleanouts at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 14 23 - 5
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
3. Locate cleanouts at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping.
4. Locate cleanouts at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
F. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor.
G. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
H. Install test tees in vertical conductors and near floor.
I. Install wall cleanouts in vertical conductors. Install access door in wall if indicated.
J. Install through-penetration fire stop assemblies in plastic conductors at concrete floor penetrations.
K. Install sleeve-flashing device with each conductor passing through floors with waterproof membrane.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 22 14 13 "Facility Storm Drainage Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Fabricate flashing from single piece of metal unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required:
1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of 6.0-lb/sq. ft. lead sheets, 0.0938-inch thickness or thicker.
Solder joints of 4.0-lb/sq. ft. lead sheets, 0.0625-inch thickness or thinner.
B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.
1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching the pipe size, with a minimum length of 10 inches and with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.
2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve.
3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around specialty.
C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 14 23 - 6
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
END OF SECTION 22 14 23
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 05 00 - 1
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
SECTION 23 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2. Transition fittings.
3. Dielectric fittings.
4. Mechanical sleeve seals.
5. Sleeves.
6. Escutcheons.
7. Grout.
8. Mechanical demolition.
9. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
10. Painting and finishing.
11. Concrete bases.
12. Supports and anchorages.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within concrete pipe trench and unheated shelters.
F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
3. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:
1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 05 00 - 2
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following if proposed to be used on this project:
1. Transition fittings.
2. Dielectric fittings.
3. Mechanical sleeve seals.
4. Escutcheons.
B. Welding certificates.
1. Certificates shall be applicable for materials to be joined at the job-site.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." ASME Section VIII.
B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current.
C. Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.
D. Piping penetration through fire-rated construction assemblies, including accessory components; sleeves, sealants, packing materials and methods, and installation shall meet the requirements of the CBC, and shall be California State Fire Marshal approved.
Firestopping details shall bear the UL label, indicate F-rating, T-rating, and shall meet the requirements of the California Building Code.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames." Coordinate to avoid access
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 05 00 - 3
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
panels at hard lid ceiling if possible. Access panel shall be located in accessible area for maintenance convenience and safety and limit disturbance to the public.
D. Coordinate with other sections of the specifications for the applicability of materials specified in this section. Not every product or material listed may be used.
E. Coordinate requirements of this section with actual work to be performed. This section is general in scope for basic materials and methods, all of which may not actually apply to this project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.
2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: Bolts shall be United States Customary System bolts and nuts (e.g. ¾”). Metric bolts and nuts shall not be used. Bolts and nuts shall be stainless steel with heavy hex nuts. For HTW applications, bolts shall meet ASTM A193 Grade B7 and nuts shall meet ASTM A194 Grade 2H.
D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 05 00 - 4
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general- duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:
1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.
2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.
I. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.
2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.
b. Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div.
c. Ford Meter Box Company, Incorporated (The); Pipe Products Div. d. JCM Industries.
e. Smith-Blair, Inc.
f. Viking Johnson.
g. Or equal.
2. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling.
3. Underground Piping NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling.
4. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.
B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent- cement-joint end.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Eslon Thermoplastics.
b. Or equal.
C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Thompson Plastics, Inc.
b. Or equal.
D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, CPVC four-part union. Include brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.
1. Manufacturers:
a. NIBCO INC.
b. NIBCO, Inc.; Chemtrol Div.
c. Or equal.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 05 00 - 5
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C. Dielectric Unions: Shall not be used. Provide 6” long brass nipple with brass unions. Or brass union and bronze ball valve on ends of nipple.
D. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, Inc.
c. Central Plastics Company.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
e. Or equal.
2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.
E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Lochinvar Corp.
c. Or equal.
F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Perfection Corp.
b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. Victaulic Co. of America.
e. Or equal.
2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Calpico, Inc.
c. Metraflex Co.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
e. Thunderline Modular Seals; Link-Seal
f. Or equal.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 05 00 - 6
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
3. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
5. Link-Seal shall be basis of design.
2.7 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange.
Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. Acceptable only for concrete foundation walls below grade.
F. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
2.8 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome- plated finish.
C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.
D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass
E. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.
F. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.
2.9 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 05 00 - 7
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G. Install piping at indicated slopes.
H. Install piping free of sags and bends.
I. Install fittings or custom bends for changes in direction and branch connections.
J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:
1. New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep- pattern type.
b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One- piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with rough-brass finish.
g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type. h. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate type.
2. Existing Piping: Use the following:
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 05 00 - 8
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.
b. Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and spring clips.
c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split- casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.
d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.
e. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, cast-brass type. f. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, floor-plate type.
M. Mounting hardware, including nuts, bolts and washers for outdoor applications and below grade applications must be of stainless steel materials.
N. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes, except in Group L occupancy, and other locations where spill control is needed.
O. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior concrete and masonry walls, and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. b. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors for areas indicated on fire code drawings as “Group L Occupancy” 4 inches above finished floor level, including slabs on grade.
2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For Group L occupancies, mechanical rooms, and wet area applications where spill containment is required. b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For applications not requiring spill containment. c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.
d. Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.
5. Where required, sleeve application and installation shall comply with UL approved Firestopping Detail.
6. Coordinate requirements of sound-proofing caulk, as determined by the Sound and Vibration Consultant’s recommendations.
Q. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 05 00 - 9
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve.
Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
R. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials per UBC requirements. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for material and installation requirements. Piping penetration through fire-rated construction assemblies, including accessory components; sleeves, sealants, packing materials and methods, and installation shall conform to Underwriters Laboratories Listed firestop systems.
S. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
T. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.
U. Install valves in readily accessible locations, avoiding hard-lid ceilings where possible.
Provide access panels for valve access complying with Division 08, and coordinate access panel locations with other disciplines.
3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
D. Oxyacetylene torch welding, and cutting of structural steel or bolt holes shall not be permissible.
E. Install main and branch piping using specified fittings, “T-drill”, “welded nozzles”, or “Side- Tap” or similar fitting substitution style connections are not acceptable.
F. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
G. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
H. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 05 00 - 10
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
I. Welded Joints: See Section 23 0511 “Welding Pressure Piping.”
J. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
K. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.
2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes.
3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138 Appendix.
L. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
M. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
N. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.
2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
O. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install shut-off valves at final connection to each piece of equipment.
2. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 1/2 and smaller, at final connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Install flanges, in piping NPS 3 and larger, at final connection to each piece of equipment.
4. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.
5. Wet Piping Systems: Install brass union, ball valve and brass nipple fitting to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.
3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces.
C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 05 00 - 11
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
minimum interference to other installations. Grease fittings shall be installed in accessible locations. Extended lube lines are not acceptable.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.5 PAINTING
A. Painting of mechanical systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Section "High Performance Coatings."
B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.
3.6 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to CBC seismic zone 4 requirements.
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, vibration isolator, or seismic restraint. Provide 1 inch chamfer at all corners and round over edge.
2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.
3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. Minimum embedment shall comply with seismic engineer’s calculations.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
7. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
3.7 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
D. Outdoor Applications: Outdoor support assemblies and accessories shall be of “stainless steel material”, or “hot-dip galvanized carbon steel with high-performance coatings”, as noted below:
1. Stainless steel: Mounting hardware such as bolts, nuts, washers, straps, brackets, fastening hardware etc., shall be stainless steel.
2. Coated galvanized steel: Carbon steel support assemblies, including all metal fabrications for use outdoors shall comply with each paragraph listed below:
a. Assemblies must be shop-fabricated and pre-assembled for one-piece hot-dip galvanized coating process.
b. After hot-dip galvanized coating is applied, a high-performance exterior coating system shall be applied. Provide High-Performance Exterior
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 05 00 - 12
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
Coating Systems conforming to Division 09 “High Performance Coatings”, meeting all performance requirements, including salt spray test performance.
c. Touch-up and repair per manufacturer’s recommendations after field installation.
E. Rooftop Applications: Rooftop support assemblies and accessories shall be fabricated for outdoor applications as noted above, and shall be designed per SMACNA design requirements.
1. SMACNA Clearances: Pipes, pipe racks, and equipment shall be installed high enough above roofing surfaces to allow roofing access for maintenance and repair. Install piping and equipment at a minimum height as shown in Table 4-1 of SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual – 5th Edition.
2. SMACNA Support Systems: Piping systems and equipment supports, unless otherwise shown, use round column supports to tie-in to structure with lead jacks for built-up roofs, and single-ply preformed jacks for single-ply roofs, lead flashing, and lead umbrellas with stainless steel draw band per Figure 4-16A, or Figure 4-16B, of SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual – 5th Edition.
3.8 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.
END OF SECTION 23 05 00
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
23 05 13 - 1
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
SECTION 23 05 13
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on alternating- current power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:
1. Motor controllers.
2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
B. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.
2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 95 deg F and rated for a coastal environment.
B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
23 05 13 - 2
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B. Efficiency: Premium efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
C. Service Factor: 1.15.
D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.
1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.
2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.
E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.
F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.
G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.
I. Insulation: Class F.
J. Code Letter Designation:
1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.
2. Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
K. Enclosure Material: Totally Enclosed, Fan Cooled. Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T.
2.4 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method.
B. Motors Used with Variable-Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width-modulated inverters.
2. Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.
3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.
4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors.
C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
23 05 13 - 3
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:
1. Permanent-split capacitor.
2. Split phase.
3. Capacitor start, inductor run.
4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.
C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.
E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 23 05 13
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29 - 1
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
SECTION 23 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.
2. Trapeze pipe hangers.
3. Metal framing systems.
4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
5. Fastener systems.
6. Equipment stands.
7. Equipment supports.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for components:
1. Trapeze pipe hangers.
2. Metal framing systems.
3. Pipe stands.
4. Equipment supports.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Structural-Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29 - 2
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.
3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction.
2.2 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.
2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized, hot-dip galvanized, or electro- galvanized.
3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coated, or epoxy powder-coated.
4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support bearing surface of piping.
5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.
B. Stainless Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.
2. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support bearing surface of piping.
3. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel.
2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP-58, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.
2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:
1. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated, pipe-support assembly made of steel channels, accessories, fittings, and other components for supporting multiple parallel pipes.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29 - 3
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
2. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly.
3. Channels: Continuous slotted carbon-steel channel with inturned lips.
4. Channel Width: Selected for applicable load criteria.
5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.
6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of galvanized steel.
7. Metallic Coating: Pregalvanized G90.
2.5 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psi or ASTM C591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psi minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.
B. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C533, Type I calcium silicate with 100-psi ASTM C552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psi or ASTM C591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psi minimum compressive strength.
C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.
2.6 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type anchors for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
1. Indoor Applications: Zinc-coated or stainless steel.
2. Outdoor Applications: Stainless steel.
2.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel shapes.
2.8 OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT STANDS
1. Description: Individual foot supports with elevated adjustable channel cross bars and clamps/fasteners/bolts for ground or roof supported outdoor equipment
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29 - 4
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
components, without roof membrane penetration, in a pre-fabricated system that can be modularly-assembled on site.
2. Foot Material: Rubber or polypropylene.
3. Rails Material: Hot dip galvanized carbon steel.
4. Wind/Sliding Load Resistance: Up to 100 mph minimum.
2.9 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: ASTM B221.
B. Carbon Steel: ASTM A1011/A1011M.
C. Structural Steel: ASTM A36/A36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; galvanized.
D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M.
E. Threaded Rods: Continuously threaded. Zinc-plated or galvanized steel for indoor applications and stainless steel for outdoor applications. Mating nuts and washers of similar materials as rods.
F. Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping materials and installation for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.
B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.
3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.
B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29 - 5
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A36/A36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support together on field-assembled strut systems.
D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
E. Fastener System Installation:
1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer.
Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Pipe Stand Installation:
1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounted Type: Assemble components and mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.
2. Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. See Section 07 72 00 "Roof Accessories" for curbs.
G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.
H. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
I. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
J. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
K. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
L. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
M. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
N. Insulated Piping:
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29 - 6
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.
Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
5. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29 - 7
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Section 09 91 10 "Interior and Exterior Painting" for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A780/A780M.
3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.
B. Comply with MSS SP-58 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports metal trapeze pipe hangers and metal framing systems and attachments for general service applications.
F. Use stainless steel pipe hangers attachments for hostile environment applications.
G. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless steel attachments for copper piping and tubing.
H. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29 - 8
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
I. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.
J. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
2. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required.
3. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
4. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.
5. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
6. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
7. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
8. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.
9. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.
10. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
11. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction.
12. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.
13. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.
14. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
15. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
16. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 24, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
17. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is unnecessary.
18. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is unnecessary.
19. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 30 if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction.
K. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29 - 9
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
L. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments.
5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
M. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar- joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.
4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.
6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange edge.
8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads.
10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel.
12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.
b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.
13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited.
N. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29 - 10
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
O. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.
2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches.
3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with springs.
4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in piping systems.
5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.
6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.
7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support.
8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load- adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:
a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.
b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.
P. Comply with MSS SP-58 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.
Q. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.
R. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.
END OF SECTION 23 05 29
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 53 - 1
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
SECTION 23 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Equipment labels.
2. Pipe labels.
3. Valve tags.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.
C. Valve numbering scheme.
D. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Metal Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: stainless steel, 0.025-inch or anodized aluminum, 0.032- inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2. Letter Color: Black.
3. Background Color: Natural
4. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.
5. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.
6. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 53 - 2
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
7. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.
C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11- inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number, and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
2.2 PIPE LABELS
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction according to ASME A13.1.
B. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.
C. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances.
2.3 VALVE TAGS
A. Description: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers.
1. Tag Material: stainless steel, 0.025-inch or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain or beaded chain or S-hook.
B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 53 - 3
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.
3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
3.3 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.4 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
B. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes, including pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.
C. Pipe Label Color Schedule:
1. Chilled-Water Piping: White letters on a safety-green background.
2. Heating Water Piping: Black letters on a safety-orange background.
3. Refrigerant Piping: Black letters on a safety-white background.
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 53 - 4
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and lawn- watering hose connections, and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.
B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:
1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:
a. Chilled Water: 1-1/2 inches round.
b. Refrigerant: 1-1/2 inches round.
c. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches round.
2. Valve-Tag Colors:
a. Toxic and Corrosive Fluids: Black letters on a safety-orange background. b. Flammable Fluids: Black letters on a safety-yellow background. c. Combustible Fluids: White letters on a safety-brown background. d. Potable and Other Water: White letters on a safety-green background. e. Compressed Air: White letters on a safety-blue background. f. Defined by User: White letters on a safety-purple background, black letters on a safety-white background, white letters on a safety-gray background, and white letters on a safety-black background END OF SECTION 23 05 53
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 1
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
SECTION 23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Balancing Water Systems:
a. Air Cooled Chillers.
b. Chilled Water Pumps
2. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Equipment:
a. Motors.
b. Air Cooled Chillers
c. Chilled Water Pumps
3. Testing, adjusting, and balancing existing systems and equipment.
4. Control system verification.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
B. BAS: Building automation systems.
C. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
D. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
E. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.
F. TAB Specialist: An independent entity meeting qualifications to perform TAB work.
G. TDH: Total dynamic head.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 2
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. TAB Conference: If requested by the Owner, conduct a TAB conference at Project site after approval of the TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details.
1. Minimum Agenda Items:
a. The Contract Documents examination report.
b. The TAB plan.
c. Needs for coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors. d. Proposed procedures for documentation and communication flow.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that the TAB specialist and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.
C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.
D. System Readiness Checklists: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit system readiness checklists as specified in "Preparation" Article.
E. Examination Report: Submit a summary report of the examination review required in "Examination" Article.
F. Certified TAB reports.
G. Sample report forms.
H. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:
1. Instrument type and make.
2. Serial number.
3. Application.
4. Dates of use.
5. Dates of calibration.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. TAB Specialists Qualifications: Certified by AABC.
1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC.
2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC as a TAB technician.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 3
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
B. TAB Specialists Qualifications: Certified by NEBB or TABB.
1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by NEBB or TABB.
2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by NEBB or TABB as a TAB technician.
C. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 111, Section 4, "Instrumentation."
D. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing."
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
B. Examine installed systems for balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are applicable for intended purpose and are accessible.
C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.
D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required.
F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.
1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 4
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.
G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.
H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.
I. Examine HVAC equipment and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, filters are clean, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
J. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens have been replaced by permanent screens with indicated perforations.
K. Examine control valves for proper installation for their intended function of throttling, diverting, or mixing fluid flows.
L. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
M. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.
N. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures.
Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes the following:
1. Equipment and systems to be tested.
2. Strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems.
3. Instrumentation to be used.
4. Sample forms with specific identification for all equipment.
B. Perform system-readiness checks of HVAC systems and equipment to verify system readiness for TAB work. Include, at a minimum, the following:
1. Hydronics:
a. Verify leakage and pressure tests on water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.
b. Piping is complete with terminals installed.
c. Water treatment is complete.
d. Systems are flushed, filled, and air purged.
e. Strainers are pulled and cleaned.
f. Control valves are functioning per the sequence of operation. g. Shutoff and balance valves have been verified to be 100 percent open. h. Pumps are started and proper rotation is verified.
i. Pump gage connections are installed directly at pump inlet and outlet flanges or in discharge and suction pipe prior to valves or strainers. j. Variable-frequency controllers' startup is complete and safeties are verified.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 5
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
k. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided.
3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance" and in this Section.
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.
1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts.
2. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 23 07 19 "HVAC Piping Insulation."
C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.
D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.
3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Cross-check the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.
E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
3.5 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
A. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.
2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 6
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
4. Phase and hertz.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter size and thermal-protection-element rating.
8. Service factor and frame size.
B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test manual bypass of controller to prove proper operation.
3.6 CONTROLS VERIFICATION
A. In conjunction with system balancing, perform the following:
1. Verify temperature control system is operating within the design limitations.
2. Confirm that the sequences of operation are in compliance with Contract Documents.
3. Verify that controllers are calibrated and function as intended.
4. Verify that controller set points are as indicated.
5. Verify the operation of lockout or interlock systems.
6. Verify the operation of valve and damper actuators.
7. Verify that controlled devices are properly installed and connected to correct controller.
8. Verify that controlled devices travel freely and are in position indicated by controller: open, closed, or modulating.
9. Verify location and installation of sensors to ensure that they sense only intended temperature, humidity, or pressure.
B. Reporting: Include a summary of verifications performed, remaining deficiencies, and variations from indicated conditions.
3.7 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused.
1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan.
2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate information.
3. Check the refrigerant charge.
4. Check the condition of filters.
5. Check the condition of coils.
6. Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate-drain trap.
7. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication.
8. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements taken. Report deficiencies.
B. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished. Verify the following:
1. New filters are installed.
2. Coils are clean and fins combed.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 7
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
3. Drain pans are clean.
4. Fans are clean.
5. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated.
6. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected.
C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are affected by the renovation work.
1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows, and determine the new fan speed and the face velocity of filters and coils.
2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment manufacturer.
3. If calculations increase or decrease the airflow rates and water flow rates by more than 5 percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated rates. If increase or decrease is 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required.
4. Balance each air outlet.
3.8 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system's airflow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.
3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.
4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.
B. Maintaining pressure relationships as designed shall have priority over the tolerances specified above.
3.9 PROGRESS REPORTING
A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.
3.10 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems.
1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.
2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
3. Certify validity and accuracy of field data.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 8
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:
1. Pump curves.
2. Fan curves.
3. Manufacturers' test data.
4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and Product Data.
C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of the TAB specialist.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Architect's name and address.
6. Engineer's name and address.
7. Contractor's name and address.
8. Report date.
9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.
10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report.
11. Summary of contents including the following:
a. Indicated versus final performance.
b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.
12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.
14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.
15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems.
Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:
1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
2. Water flow rates.
3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
5. Terminal units.
6. Balancing stations.
7. Position of balancing devices.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 9
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
E. Air Cooled Chiller Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to manufacturer's factory startup equipment reports, include the following:
1. Unit Data:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Fuel type in input data.
g. Output capacity in Btu/h.
h. Ignition type.
i. Burner-control types.
j. Motor horsepower and rpm.
k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz.
l. Motor full-load amperage and service factor.
m. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
n. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.
2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Total airflow rate in cfm.
b. Entering-air temperature in deg F.
c. Leaving-air temperature in deg F.
d. Air temperature differential in deg F.
e. Entering-air static pressure in inches wg.
f. Leaving-air static pressure in inches wg.
g. Air static-pressure differential in inches wg.
h. Low-fire fuel input in Btu/h.
i. High-fire fuel input in Btu/h.
j. Manifold pressure in psig.
k. High-temperature-limit setting in deg F.
l. Operating set point in Btu/h.
m. Motor voltage at each connection.
n. Motor amperage for each phase.
o. Heating value of fuel in Btu/h.
3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Static head in feet of head or psig.
b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig.
c. Actual impeller size in inches.
d. Full-open flow rate in gpm.
e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig.
f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig.
g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig.
h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig.
i. Final water flow rate in gpm.
j. Voltage at each connection.
k. Amperage for each phase.
F. Instrument Calibration Reports:
1. Report Data:
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 10
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
a. Instrument type and make.
b. Serial number.
c. Application.
d. Dates of use.
e. Dates of calibration.
3.11 VERIFICATION OF TAB REPORT
A. The TAB specialist's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of Construction Manager.
B. Construction Manager shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day.
C. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED."
D. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected.
E. If TAB work fails, proceed as follows:
1. TAB specialists shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final inspection.
2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB specialist to complete TAB work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB specialist's final payment.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.12 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.
END OF SECTION 23 05 93
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 07 19 - 1
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
SECTION 23 07 19
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes insulation for HVAC piping systems.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied if any).
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.
2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation.
3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation.
5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties.
6. Detail application of field-applied jackets.
7. Detail application at linkages of control devices.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated.
Include dates of tests and test methods employed.
C. Field quality-control reports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 07 19 - 2
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products in accordance with ASTM E84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke- developed index of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke- developed index of 150 or less.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 23 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application.
Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.
C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.
1.8 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C. Products that come into contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested in accordance with ASTM C871.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 07 19 - 3
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable in accordance with ASTM C795.
E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.
F. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Comply with ASTM C552.
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Type II, Class 1, without jacket.
2. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Type II, Class 2, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL jacket.
3. Factory fabricate shapes in accordance with ASTM C450 and ASTM C585.
4. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
G. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C534/C534M, Type I for tubular materials, Type II for sheet materials.
H. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C1393.
1. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ jacket.
2. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more.
3. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less.
4. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C195.
B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C196.
C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C449.
2.3 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.
B. Calcium Silicate Adhesive: Fibrous, sodium-silicate-based adhesive with a service temperature range of 50 to 800 deg F.
C. Cellular-Glass Adhesive: Two-component, thermosetting urethane adhesive containing no flammable solvents, with a service temperature range of minus 100 to plus 200 deg F.
D. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Solvent-based adhesive.
1. Flame-spread index shall be 25 or less and smoke-developed index shall be 50 or less as tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Wet Flash Point: Below 0 deg F.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 07 19 - 4
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
3. Service Temperature Range: 40 to 200 deg F.
4. Color: Black.
E. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
F. ASJ Adhesive and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A, for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
2.4 MASTICS AND COATINGS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
B. Vapor-Retarder Mastic, Solvent Based, Indoor Use: Suitable for indoor use on below- ambient services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM E96/E96M or ASTM F1249.
2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F.
3. Color: White.
C. Vapor-Retarder Mastic, Solvent Based, Outdoor Use: Suitable for outdoor use on below- ambient services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM E96/E96M or ASTM F1249.
2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F.
3. Color: White.
2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES
A. Adhesives shall comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A, and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
1. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over pipe insulation.
2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F.
3. Color: White.
2.6 SEALANTS
A. Materials shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
B. Joint Sealants:
1. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
a. Service Temperature Range: Minus 150 to plus 250 deg F. b. Color: White or gray.
C. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
3. Color: Aluminum.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 07 19 - 5
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
D. ASJ Flashing Sealants and PVDC and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
3. Color: White.
2.7 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications.
When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type II.
2.8 TAPES
A. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C1136.
1. Width: 3 inches.
2. Thickness: 6.5 mils.
3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
4. Elongation: 2 percent.
5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
B. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.
1. Width: 2 inches.
2. Thickness: 3.7 mils.
3. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width.
4. Elongation: 5 percent.
5. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.
2.9 SECUREMENTS
A. Bands:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.
2. Aluminum: ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.
3. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel, with ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands. Spring size is determined by manufacturer for application.
B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4 inch wide, stainless steel or Monel.
C. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 07 19 - 6
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.
2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.
B. Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:
1. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature of between 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.
C. Coordinate insulation installation with the tradesman installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
D. Mix insulating cement with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and of thicknesses required for each item of pipe system, as specified in insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 07 19 - 7
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
G. Keep insulation materials dry during storage, application, and finishing. Replace insulation materials that get wet.
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends attached to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.
L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward-clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self- sealing lap. Staple laps with outward-clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.
a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape, in accordance with insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 25 percent of its nominal thickness.
N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches in similar fashion to butt joints.
P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 07 19 - 8
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
1. Vibration-control devices.
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
3.4 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.
4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.
4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
1. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.
E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping."
3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials, except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, Mechanical Couplings, and Unions:
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 07 19 - 9
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, mechanical couplings, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.
2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as that of adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive.
Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.
4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.
5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers, so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below- ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.
6. Insulate flanges, mechanical couplings, and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation to fit. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union" matching size and color of pipe labels.
7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric- reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.
8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket, except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing, using PVC tape.
C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands, and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient services, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 07 19 - 10
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive, as recommended by insulation material manufacturer, and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular- glass block insulation of same thickness as that of pipe insulation.
4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body.
2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as that of pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.
2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 07 19 - 11
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as that of pipe insulation when available.
2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties, and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
3.8 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands, and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive, as recommended by insulation material manufacturer, and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.
4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation when available.
2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation.
Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation when available.
2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.
3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 07 19 - 12
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
3.9 FINISHES
A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by the owner. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.
D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless steel jackets.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
D. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.
E. Tests and Inspections: Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.
F. All insulation applications will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
G. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.11 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Insulation conductivity and thickness per pipe size shall comply with schedules in this Section or with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 07 19 - 13
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
B. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
C. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1. Underground piping.
2. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
3.12 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick.
b. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.
B. Chilled Water and Brine, Above 40 Deg F:
1. NPS 12 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Cellular Glass: 2 inches thick.
b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 2 inches thick.
C. Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and Below:
1. NPS 12 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Cellular Glass: 2 inches thick.
b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 2 inches thick.
D. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.
E. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Flexible Tubing:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick.
F. Refrigerant Liquid Piping:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.
3.13 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Chilled Water and Brine:
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 07 19 - 14
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Cellular Glass: 3 inches thick.
b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 3 inches thick.
B. Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and Below:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Cellular Glass: 3 inches thick.
b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 2 inches thick.
C. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick.
D. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Flexible Tubing:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick.
E. Refrigerant Liquid Piping:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick.
END OF SECTION 23 07 19
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
23 08 00 - 1
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
SECTION 23 08 00
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes commissioning process requirements for the following HVAC&R systems, assemblies, and equipment:
1. Cooling generation systems
2. Controls and instrumentation, including BAS.
3. Systems testing and balancing verification, including chilled water piping systems
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BAS: Building automation system.
B. DDC: Direct digital controls.
C. HVAC&R: Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning, and Refrigeration.
D. "Systems," "Subsystems," "Equipment," and "Components": Where these terms are used together or separately, they shall mean "as-built" systems, subsystems, equipment, and components.
E. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For BAS and HVAC&R Testing Technician.
B. Construction Checklists: See related Sections for technical requirements for the following construction checklists:
1. Vibration and seismic controls for HVAC&R piping and equipment.
2. Instrumentation and control for HVAC&R.
3. Chilled water piping.
4. Chillers
5. Pumps
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
23 08 00 - 2
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. BAS Testing Technician Qualifications: Technicians to perform BAS construction checklist verification tests, construction checklist verification test demonstrations, commissioning tests, and commissioning test demonstrations shall have the following minimum qualifications:
1. Journey-level or equivalent skill level with knowledge of BAS, HVAC&R, electrical concepts, and building operations.
2. Minimum three years' experience installing, servicing, and operating systems manufactured by approved manufacturer.
3. International Society of Automation (ISA) Certified Control Systems Technician (CCST) Level I.
B. HVAC&R Testing Technician Qualifications: Technicians to perform HVAC&R construction checklist verification tests, construction checklist verification test demonstrations, commissioning tests, and commissioning test demonstrations shall have the following minimum qualifications:
1. Journey-level or equivalent skill level. Vocational School four-year program graduate or an Associates degree in mechanical systems, air conditioning, or similar field. Degree may be offset by three years' experience in servicing mechanical systems in the HVAC industry. Generally, required knowledge includes HVAC&R systems, electrical concepts, building operations, and application and use of tools and instrumentation to measure performance of HVAC&R equipment, assemblies, and systems.
2. Minimum three years' experience installing, servicing, and operating systems manufactured by approved manufacturer.
3. One of the following:
a. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Technician.
b. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) Certified Test and Balance Technician.
c. Owner retains the right to waive NEBB or AABC Certification.
C. Testing Equipment and Instrumentation Quality and Calibration: For test equipment and instrumentation required to perform HVAC&R commissioning work, perform the following:
1. Submit test equipment and instrumentation list. For each equipment or instrument, identify the following:
a. Equipment/instrument identification number.
b. Planned commissioning application or use.
c. Manufacturer, make, model, and serial number.
d. Calibration history, including certificates from agencies that calibrate the equipment and instrumentation.
2. Test equipment and instrumentation shall meet the following criteria:
a. Capable of testing and measuring performance within the specified acceptance criteria.
b. Be calibrated at the manufacturer's recommended intervals with current calibration tags permanently affixed to the instrument being used.
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
23 08 00 - 3
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
c. Be maintained in good repair and operating condition throughout the duration of use on this Project.
d. Be recalibrated/repaired if dropped or damaged in any way since last calibrated.
D. Proprietary Test Instrumentation and Tools:
1. Equipment Manufacturer's Proprietary Instrumentation and Tools: For installed equipment included in the commissioning process, test instrumentation and tools manufactured or prescribed by equipment manufacturer to service, calibrate, adjust, repair, or otherwise work on its equipment or required as a condition of equipment warranty, perform the following:
a. Submit proprietary instrumentation and tools list. For each instrument or tool, identify the following:
1) Instrument or tool identification number.
2) Equipment schedule designation of equipment for which the instrument or tool is required.
3) Manufacturer, make, model, and serial number.
4) Calibration history, including certificates from agencies that calibrate the instrument or tool, where appropriate.
b. Include a separate list of proprietary test instrumentation and tools in the operation and maintenance manuals.
c. HVAC&R proprietary test instrumentation and tools become the property of Owner at the time of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Certify that HVAC&R systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, calibrated, and started and are operating according to the Contract Documents and approved Shop Drawings and submittals.
B. Certify that HVAC&R instrumentation and control systems have been completed and calibrated, that they are operating according to the Contract Documents and approved Shop Drawings and submittals, and that pretest set points have been recorded.
C. Certify that TAB procedures have been completed and that TAB reports have been submitted, discrepancies corrected, and corrective work approved.
D. Set systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested according to approved test procedures (e.g., normal shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual position, unoccupied cycle, emergency power, and alarm conditions).
E. Measure capacities and effectiveness of systems, assemblies, subsystems, equipment, and components, including operational and control functions to verify compliance with acceptance criteria.
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
23 08 00 - 4
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
F. Test systems, assemblies, subsystems, equipment, and components operating modes, interlocks, control responses, and responses to abnormal or emergency conditions, and response according to acceptance criteria.
G. Construction Checklists: Prepare and submit detailed construction checklists for HVAC&R systems, subsystems, equipment, and components.
1. Contributors to the development of construction checklists shall include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. HVAC&R systems and equipment installers.
b. TAB technicians.
c. HVAC&R instrumentation and controls installers.
H. Perform tests using design conditions, whenever possible.
1. Simulated conditions may, with approval of Architect, be imposed using an artificial load when it is impractical to test under design conditions. Before simulating conditions, calibrate testing instruments. Provide equipment to simulate loads. Set simulated conditions as directed by Commissioning Coordinator and document simulated conditions and methods of simulation. After tests, return configurations and settings to normal operating conditions.
2. Commissioning test procedures may direct that set points be altered when simulating conditions is impractical.
3. Commissioning test procedures may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator when design or simulating conditions and altering set points are impractical.
I. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the HVAC&R system, document the deficiency and report it to Owner. After deficiencies are resolved, reschedule tests.
J. If seasonal testing is specified, complete appropriate initial performance tests and documentation and schedule seasonal tests.
K. Coordinate schedule with, and perform the following activities at the direction of, Commissioning Coordinator.
L. Comply with construction checklist requirements, including material verification, installation checks, start-up, and performance tests requirements specified in Sections specifying HVAC systems and equipment.
M. Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to complete and document the following:
1. Performance tests.
2. Demonstration of a sample of performance tests.
3. Commissioning tests.
4. Commissioning test demonstrations.
3.2 TAB COMMISSIONING TESTS
A. TAB Verification:
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
23 08 00 - 5
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
1. Prerequisites: Completion of "Examination" Article requirements and correction of deficiencies, as specified in Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."
2. Completion of "Preparation" Article requirements for preparation of a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures, and system-readiness checks and reports, as specified in Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."
3. Scope: HVAC&R air systems and hydronic piping systems.
4. Purpose: Differential flow relationships intended to maintain air pressurization differentials between the various areas of Project.
5. Conditions of the Test:
a. Commissioning Test Demonstration Sampling Rate: As specified in "Inspections" Article in Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."
b. Systems operating in full heating mode with minimum outside-air volume.
c. Systems operating in full cooling mode with minimum outside-air volume.
d. For measurements at air-handling units with economizer controls; systems operating in economizer mode with 100 percent outside air.
6. Acceptance Criteria:
a. Under all conditions, rechecked measurements comply with "Inspections" Article in Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC." b. Additionally, no rechecked measurement shall differ from measurements documented in the final report by more than two times the tolerances allowed.
c. Under all conditions, where the Contract Documents indicate a differential in airflow between supply and exhaust and/or return in a space, the differential relationship shall be maintained.
3.3 CENTRAL REFRIGERATION SYSTEM COMMISSIONING TESTS
A. Start and Stop Chilled-Water Pump(s):
1. Prerequisites: Installation verification of the following:
a. Startup of chilled-water pump(s).
b. Input Device: Flow switch in chilled-water circuit.
c. Output Device: DDC system command to starter relay.
d. Display of the following at the operator's workstation:
1) Chilled-water flow indication.
2) Chilled-water pump(s) on-off status.
3) Chilled-water pump(s) on-off indication.
2. Scope: Chilled-water system, including chilled-water pump(s), associated controls, and condenser-water system controls.
3. Purpose:
a. Chilled-water pump(s) start.
b. Chilled-water pump(s) shutdown.
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
23 08 00 - 6
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
4. Conditions of the Test:
a. Verify Start: Start with chilled-water pump enable-input device in the "disable" state to prevent pump start. Place the enable-input device in the "enable" state.
b. Verify Shutdown: Start with the enable-input device in the "enable" state to allow the pump(s) to run. Then place the enable-input device to the "disable" state.
5. Acceptance Criteria:
a. Start: Chilled-water pump(s) start when and only when the enable-input device is in the "enable" state.
b. Shutdown: The enable-input device stops the chilled-water pump(s) when placed in the "disable" state.
END OF SECTION 23 08 00
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
23 09 23 - 1
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
SECTION 23 09 23
DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The Direct-Digital Control (DDC) System specified herein shall include materials, operator workstation, building controllers, sensors, control valves, wiring, installation, start-up, testing, documentation and training for a complete operable system as required for this project.
B. Controls Engineering shall be provided by the local controls manufacturer representative.
C. Work specified under this section shall be performed by, or under the direct supervision of the local controls manufacturer representative, or by a contractor that is certified by the controls manufacture to perform all work within Section 23 09 00 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC and those sections of 23 09 00 that have been specified herein.
D. Alternate techniques, modifications or changes to any aspect of these specifications may be submitted as a voluntary alternate no later than (15) days prior to the bid date and with sufficient information for a complete evaluation. This information shall include product data sheets, a UL508A Standard for Industrial Control Panels statement of compliance for any locally manufactured control panels, a detailed sequence of operation and engineered shop drawing. Shop drawings shall include the following as a minimum. Point to point wiring diagrams for each piece of equipment to be controlled, a network riser diagram that will depict quantity and location of the operator workstation, controllers, routers and repeaters required for this project.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 01 00 00: General Requirements
B. 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures
C. 23 00 00: Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC)
D. 23 08 00: Commissioning of HVAC
E. 26 00 00: Electrical
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit engineered shop drawings, sequences of operation, third party equipment and controls integration points and product data sheets covering all items of equipment for the proposed system prior to installation for approval. Any deviation from the contract documents shall be noted and the drawings signed and dated by the Contractor.
Additionally, submit a UL508A Standard for Industrial Control Panels statement of compliance for any locally manufactured control panels.
B. After completion of the installation and commissioning, a full set of as-built documentation shall be turned over to the Owner. The as-built shall include operation and maintenance manuals, sequence of operation, shop drawings and digital copies of the following.
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
23 09 23 - 2
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
1. Complete DDC System database backup
2. Source files for all custom written controller applications
3. Source files for graphics if required for this project
1.04 WARRANTY
A. Components, system software, and parts shall be guaranteed against defects in materials, fabrication, and execution for (1) year from date of system acceptance. Provide labor and materials to repair, reprogram, or replace components at no charge to the Owner during the warranty period.
B. Provide a list of applicable warranties for components, this list shall include warranty information, names, addresses, telephone numbers, and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services.
C. Respond to the Owner’s request for warranty service within (24) hours during normal business hours. Submit records of the nature of the call, the work performed, and the parts replaced or service rendered.
D. Contractor shall request VPN access from owner and provide remote maintenance, software updates and repair service for the duration of the warranty period.
1.05 TRAINING
A. Provide a competent instructor who is factory trained and has comprehensive knowledge of system components and operations to provide full instructions to designated personnel in the system operation, maintenance, and programming. Training shall be specifically oriented to installed equipment and systems.
B. Provide (8) hours of onsite owner familiarization and training for the installed system.
Training shall include system overview, time schedules, emergency operation, and programming and report generation.
C. Owner employees attending this training session shall be provided with the following documentation:
1. System layout point to point connection diagram.
2. System components cut sheets.
3. Operations and maintenance data.
1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Do not store or install electronic hardware on the project until non-condensing environmental conditions have been established.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. DDC Equipment: Only Carrier OPEN BACnet controls equipment will be acceptable, to match existing equipment in the building.
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
23 09 23 - 3
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
B. Controls installation will be by Russell Sigler Inc. Controls Group.
C. The local manufacture representative will operate a free 40 hour a week, toll free customer support hotline for additional user support services that are required.
2.02 SYSTEM LISTING COMPLIANCE
A. Locally manufactured control panels shall meet all requirements as outlined by UL 508A standard and shall be both approved and listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
2.03 COMMUNICATION
A. Controller and operator interface communication shall conform to ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135, BACnet.
B. Each controller shall have a communication port for temporary connection to a laptop computer or other operator interface. Connection shall support memory downloads and other commissioning and troubleshooting operations.
C. Use owner provided Ethernet backbone for network segments.
2.04 OPERATOR INTERFACE
A. Description. The control system shall be as shown and consist of a high-speed, peer-to- peer network of DDC controllers and a stand-alone web server operator interface. Depict each mechanical system and building floor plan by a point-and-click graphic. A web server shall gather data from this system and generate web pages accessible through a conventional web browser on each PC connected to the network. Operators with sufficient access level shall have an ability to make changes to all system and equipment graphics in the web server in addition to having full DDC system access to make configuration changes to the control system. Any tools required for making graphic changes shall be provided with web server.
B. Operator Interface. Furnish (1) Web server interface as shown on the system drawings.
1. With the use of an owner provided remote SMTP email server the operators interface web server shall notify personnel of an alarm and record information about an alarm in the DDC system.
2. Any required installation or commissioning software shall be provided to the owner.
C. Operator Functions. Operator interface shall allow each authorized operator to execute the following functions as a minimum:
1. Log In and Log Out
2. Point-and-click Navigation
3. View and Adjust Equipment Properties
4. View and Adjust Operating Schedules
5. View and Respond to Alarms
6. View and Configure Trends
7. Manage Control System Hardware
8. Manage Operator Access
D. System Graphics. Operator interface shall be graphical and shall include at least one graphic per piece of equipment and graphics that summarize conditions on each floor of
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
23 09 23 - 4
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
each building included in this contract. Indicate thermal comfort on floor plan summary graphics using dynamic colors to represent zone temperature relative to zone setpoint.
E. Trend Configuration. Operator shall be able to configure trend sample or change of value (COV) interval, start time, and stop time for each system data object and shall be able to retrieve data for use in spreadsheets and standard database programs.
F. Reports and Logs. Operator shall be able to select, to modify, to create, and to print reports and logs. Furnish the following standard system reports.
1. Alarm Reports
2. Schedule Reports
3. Security Reports
4. Commissioning Reports
5. Equipment Reports
G. Energy Conservation
1. Outside Air Lockout. Lock out heating or cooling modes based on configurable outside air temperature limits.
2. Demand Limiting
a. System shall monitor building power consumption from building power meter pulse generator signals or from building feeder line watt transducer or current transformer.
b. The system shall include all required hardware and software necessary to receive an Automated Demand Response (ADR) signal from the utilities Demand Response Automation Server (DRAS).
c. When power consumption exceeds adjustable levels, or the system receives an ADR signal from the utility, the system shall automatically adjust set points, and take other programmatic actions to reduce demand.
3. Optimal Start. The system shall bring the conditioned space to within occupied set points prior to the occupied time period to ensure occupant comfort.
4. Demand Controlled Ventilation (DCV).Each controlled space shall have a Carbon Dioxide (CO2) sensor and shall maintain a ventilation setpoint through a DCV algorithm to fulfill the requirements of ASHRAE standard, 62-1989 “Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality” (including Addendum 62a-1990).
2.05 BUILDING CONTROLLERS
2.05.1 BACNET IP CONTROLLERS: GENERAL PURPOSE
A. Advanced Application Controllers (AAC) shall be a solid state micro-controller with configurable control module with pre-tested and factory configured software specifically designed for regulating building equipment using closed-loop Direct Digital Control and facility management routines. Controllers shall be capable operating in a stand-alone or networked manner, and shall be located where shown on the plans. The controller shall be powered from standard, off-the-shelf, Class II, 24-volt transformers. The controller shall be easily mounted in a standard NEMA 1 type enclosure without special rails or mounting hardware and as local and national code dictates. The controller shall be capable of
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
23 09 23 - 5
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
operating in either a stand-alone mode or as part of a network with an EMS operator's station and other system elements including Product Integrated Controllers (PIC's) B. BACnet. Advanced Application Controllers (AACs). AAC shall conform to BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC) device profile as specified in ANSI/ASHRAE 135, BACnet Annex L and shall be listed as a certified B-AAC in the BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL) Product Listing. AAC shall reside on a BACnet network using the MS/TP or IP Data Link/Physical layer protocol.
C. Custom Programming
The controller shall contain a graphical controller based programming language for creating complex control strategies for specific unique applications. Custom programs shall be retained in controller memory and shall not require a host CPU to operate. All custom programming point data shall be transferable from one controller to another (if networked) directly without an on-line CPU or host computer.
D. Communication.
1. Network Connection. Controller shall support a single point ethernet connection or a daisy-chained ethernet connection using the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP).
2. Ethernet Port. Provide two (2) 10/100 Base T (minimum) ethernet ports with ethernet switching capability.
3. Service Port. Provide one (1) USB port for connection to a Portable Operator's Terminal or a display.
4. Data Sharing. Each AAC shall share data as required with each networked.
5. Stand-Alone Operation. Each piece of equipment shall be controlled by a single controller to provide stand-alone control in the event of communication failure. All I/O points specified for a piece of equipment shall be integral to its controller. Provide stable and reliable stand-alone control using default values or other method for values normally read over the network such as outdoor air conditions, supply air or water temperature coming from source equipment, etc.
E. Environment. Controller hardware shall be suitable for anticipated ambient conditions.
1. Controllers used outdoors or in wet ambient conditions shall be mounted in waterproof enclosures and shall be rated for operation at -29°C to 60°C (-20°F to 140°F).
2. Controllers used in conditioned space shall be mounted in dust-protective enclosures and shall be rated for operation at 0°C to 50°C (32°F to 120°F).
F. Memory.
1. The Controller shall have a Non-Volatile Memory providing indefinite storage of application and configuration data.
2. Controller memory shall support operating system, database, and programming requirements.
G. Controller Time.
Controller shall feature and maintain a 365-day Real-Time Clock/Calendar with holiday functions.
H. Stand alone capability. The controller shall be capable of providing all control functions of the HVAC system without the use of a computer.
1. It shall establish occupancy scheduling based on its own local occupancy schedule, the closure of a contact connected to an external time clock or EMS system, or by a timed override request (1 to 24 hours) through its space temperature sensor override button.
I. Networked capability. The controller shall include the inherent capability to access the system control selections as well as to monitor system performance by means of a communicating network with a PC and EMS software program.
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
23 09 23 - 6
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
1. When networked, occupancy may be established by user interface or occupancy signal from other controller located in network.
J. Scheduling. AAC shall provide the following schedule options as a minimum:
1. Weekly. Provide separate schedules for each day of the week. Each schedule shall be able to include up to 5 occupied periods (5 start-stop pairs or 10 events).
2. Exception. Operator shall be able to designate an exception schedule for each of the next 365 days. After an exception schedule has executed, system shall discard and replace exception schedule with standard schedule for that day of the week.
3. Holiday. Operator shall be able to define 24 special or holiday schedules of varying length on a scheduling calendar that repeats each year.
K. Serviceability.
1. Controller shall have diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor.
2. Wires shall be connected to a field-removable modular terminal strip or to a termination card connected by a ribbon cable.
L. Immunity to Power and Noise. AAC shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80% nominal voltage. Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios up to 5 W at 1 m (3 ft).
M. Input and output devices shall be wired to "quick-connect plug type" terminals to facilitate removal of the module without disconnecting wiring from the plug type terminal.
N. Alarm Processing. The controller shall contain a routine to process alarms. Alarm processing logic shall also monitor return to normal conditions as part of the alarm scan. The operator will have the ability to modify the alarm/alert priority level.
O. PID Control. System shall provide direct- and reverse-acting PID (proportional-integral- derivative) algorithms. Each algorithm shall have anti-windup and selectable controlled variable, setpoint, and PID gains. Each algorithm shall calculate a time-varying analog value that can be used to position an output or to stage a series of outputs.
P. Anti-Short Cycling. Binary output objects shall be protected from short cycling by means of preconfigured minimum on-time and off-time settings, customized for the specific requirements of the application.
Q. On and Off Control with Differential. System shall provide direct- and reverse-acting on and off algorithms with adjustable differential to cycle a binary output based on a controlled variable and setpoint.
R. Inputs. Shall support the following input types as a minimum
1. Dry or pulsed dry contacts
2. 0-5 VDC
3. 0-10 VDC
4. 10K thermistors
S. Outputs. Shall support the following input types as a minimum
1. Discrete types
2. 0-10 VDC analog type
3. 80 HZ PWM
T. Real-Time Clock. Shall feature and maintain a 365-day hardware clock/calendar with holiday functions.
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
23 09 23 - 7
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
U. Library of direct digital control routines. The following types of factory tested direct digital control routines shall be provided as a minimum:
1. Indoor/Outdoor Lighting Control
2. Time Schedule with/without override
3. Enthalpy/Analog Comparison
4. Analog Comparison
5. Interlock / Permissive Interlock
6. Fan Control
7. Time Schedule with/without override
8. Unit Heater
9. Constant Volume Air Source control with Demand Controlled Ventilation
10. VAV Air Source control with Demand Controlled Ventilation
11. WSHP Loop Monitor and Pump Control
12. WSHP Loop Cooling - Closed Circuit Tower
13. WSHP Loop Cooling - Open Circuit Tower
14. WSHP Loop Heating
15. Electric Meter with Demand Limit
2.06 A. General. The control system shall be available as a complete package with the required input sensors and devices readily available. Provide BACnet Building Controllers (BC), Advanced Application Controllers (AAC), Application Specific Controllers (ASC), and Sensors (SEN) as required.
B. Stand-Alone Operation. Each piece of equipment shall be controlled by a single controller to provide stand-alone control in the event of communication failure.
C. Serviceability. Controllers shall have diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor.
D. Rooftop Unit Controller (RTC). Defined as Application Specific Controllers (ASC), shall be factory installed by the HVAC manufacturer and shall control all associated HVAC rooftop equipment functions in a single zone application or as part of a zoning system application.
1. Capacity control shall be based by the RTC internal time clock and setpoints (cooling and heating) coupled with a communicating room sensor. The controls shall provide separate occupied and unoccupied cooling and heating setpoints.
2. RTC shall utilize up to 2 speed of fan control, up to 3 stages of cooling, and up to 4 stages of heating.
3. RTC shall provide economizer control that has been certified for Fault Detection and Diagnostics (FDD) by California Energy Commission (CEC). The FDD system shall detect the following faults:
a. Air temperature sensor failure/fault
b. Not economizing when it should
c. Economizing when it should not
d. Damper not modulating
e. Excess outdoor air
E. Zone Controller (ZC). Defined as Application Specific Controllers (ASC) shall be capable of independent zone control or function as part of the zoning system.
1. ZC shall have an integrated brushless actuator, onboard pressure sensor and shall perform pressure independent zone control by measuring and controlling CFM being delivered to the zone.
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
23 09 23 - 8
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
2. The ZC shall utilize the Dual Maximum Control Setpoints VAV Box Logic as defined by Title 24.
F. Bypass Controller (BC). Defined as Application Specific Controllers (ASC) shall be capable of reading supply static pressure and controlling the bypass damper (or a VFD speed control output) to maintain the supply static set point in the supply duct. This operation shall be provided when operating within a zoning system application, or in a stand-alone mode.
1. BC shall have an integrated brushless actuator and onboard pressure sensor to measure and control duct static pressure.
G. General Purpose Controller. Defined as Advanced Application Controller (AAC) shall be a solid state micro-controller with pre-tested and factory configured software designed for controlling building equipment using DDC algorithms and facility management routines.
The controller shall be capable of operating in either a stand-alone mode or as part of a network.
2.07 FIELD INSTALLED SENSORS
A. Space Temperature Sensors shall communicate to the controller over a 4-wire communication network and have setpoint adjustment, after hours override, occupancy sensor, LCD display and a communication service port.
B. Carbon dioxide sensor (CO2) shall be integrated into the Space Temperature Sensors and have integral programming to perform automatic baseline calibration without user interface.
The recommended manual recalibration period shall not be less than five years.
C. Status indication for fans or pumps shall be provided by current sensing switch. The sensor shall be installed at the motor starter or motor to provide load indication. The unit shall consist of a current transformer, a solid state current sensing circuit (with adjustable set point) and a solid state switch. A light emitting diode (LED) shall indicate the on off status of the unit.
2.08 CONTROL PANELS
A. Provide single-door, UL 508A Listed; NEMA Type 1, 3R or 4 to match environmental conditions, wall-mount enclosures for each system under automatic control. Mount relays, switches, and controllers in cabinet and indicators, pilot lights, push buttons and switches flush on enclosure exterior face as required.
B. Fabricate panels from 16 gauge steel with ANSI 61 gray finish and shall include (1) black padlock handle that will accommodate a padlock with up to a 5/16-in. locking bar for secure access to the enclosure contents. All additional latches shall be black non-locking handle type.
C. Provide engraved name plates that identify each control panel and for each component mounted to the exterior of the enclosure.
D. Provide a complete wiring diagram, bill of material for all components and markings with the following information:
1. Manufacturer’s name or trademark
2. Supply voltage, number of phases, frequency, and full-load current for each incoming supply circuit
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
23 09 23 - 9
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
3. Enclosure type number
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 ELECTRICAL WIRING
A. This contractor is responsible for all low voltage electrical installation and wiring for a fully operational DDC System as shown on the drawings and shall perform electrical installation in accordance with local and national electrical codes and in accordance with Division 26.
B. Install all HVAC control wiring, 24vdc or less, in electrical metallic tubing (EMT) when wire is concealed in walls and in exposed areas. Rigid metal conduit (RMC) will be used when conduit will be installed on roofs. Plenum wire may be used in ceilings where anchored support is provided every 10 feet. Existing pathways and conduits to be reused.
C. Electrical Contractor is responsible for providing power from local electrical panels to the DDC System control panels.
D. When transitioning between buildings above or below ground level, provide a pull box with necessary surge suppression hardware to transition exterior rated wiring to interior applications.
3.02 ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURE
A. Upon completion of the installation, the contractor shall start-up the system and perform all necessary calibration and testing to ensure the proper operation of the DDC System.
B. The contractor shall be a member of the designated Commissioning Team and shall be responsible for performing procedures presented in specification and contract drawings as detailed in the Functional Performance Tests (FPT).
END OF SECTION 23 09 23
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 21 13 - 1
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
SECTION 23 21 13
HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes pipe and fitting materials and joining methods for the following:
1. Chilled-water piping.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of the following:
1. Plastic pipe and fittings with solvent cement.
2. RTRP and RTRF with adhesive.
3. Pressure-seal fittings.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Piping layout, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1. Suspended ceiling components.
2. Other building services.
3. Structural members.
B. Qualification Data: For Installer.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Field quality-control reports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Installers of Pressure-Sealed Joints: Installers shall be certified by pressure-seal joint manufacturer as having been trained and qualified to join piping with pressure-seal pipe couplings and fittings.
B. Steel Support Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 21 13 - 2
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
C. Pipe Welding: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.
1. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation.
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature unless otherwise indicated:
1. Chilled-Water Piping: 200 deg F.
2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.
B. Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K.
C. DWV Copper Tubing: ASTM B 306, Type DWV.
D. Copper or Bronze Pressure-Seal Fittings:
1. Housing: Copper.
2. O-Rings and Pipe Stops: EPDM.
3. Tools: Manufacturer's special tools.
4. Minimum 200-psig working-pressure rating at 250 deg F.
E. Copper, Mechanically Formed Tee Option: For forming T-branch on copper water tube.
F. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
2.3 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; welded and seamless, Grade B, and wall thickness as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.
B. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.
C. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.
D. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.
E. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250; raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 21 13 - 3
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
F. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.
G. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:
1. Material Group: 1.1.
2. End Connections: Butt welding.
3. Facings: Raised face.
H. Steel Pressure-Seal Fittings:
1. Housing: Steel.
2. O-Rings and Pipe Stop: EPDM.
3. Tools: Manufacturer's special tool.
4. Minimum 300-psig working-pressure rating at 230 deg F.
I. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of same materials and wall thicknesses as pipe in which they are installed.
2.4 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. CPVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 441/F 441M, with wall thickness as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.
1. CPVC Plastic Pipe Fittings: Socket-type pipe fittings, ASTM F 438 for Schedule 40 pipe; ASTM F 439 for Schedule 80 pipe.
B. PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, with wall thickness as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.
1. PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings: Socket-type pipe fittings, ASTM D 2466 for Schedule 40 pipe; ASTM D 2467 for Schedule 80 pipe.
2.5 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless otherwise indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 21 13 - 4
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining copper with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.
F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
G. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:
1. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
a. CPVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 490 g/L or less. b. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less. c. Solvent cement and adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
2. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. a. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less. b. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less. c. Solvent cement and adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
H. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working temperatures and pressures.
2.6 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings:
1. One-piece fitting with one threaded brass or copper insert and one solvent- cement-joint end of material and wall thickness to match plastic pipe material.
B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions:
1. Brass or copper end, solvent-cement-joint end of material and wall thickness to match plastic pipe material, rubber gasket, and threaded union.
2.7 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.
B. Dielectric Unions:
1. Description:
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 21 13 - 5
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
a. Standard: ASSE 1079.
b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.
c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
C. Dielectric Flanges:
1. Description:
a. Standard: ASSE 1079.
b. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. c. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.
d. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:
1. Description:
a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
c. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.
d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.
e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.
E. Dielectric Nipples:
1. Description:
a. Standard: IAPMO PS 66.
b. Electroplated steel nipple, complying with ASTM F 1545. c. Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F.
d. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.
e. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:
1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints.
B. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be any of the following:
1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints.
2. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints.
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 21 13 - 6
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
F. Install piping at indicated slopes.
G. Install piping free of sags and bends.
H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.
L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.
M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.
N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.
O. Install branch connections to mains using mechanically formed tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe.
P. Install valves according to Section 230523.11 "Globe Valves for HVAC Piping," Section 230523.12 "Ball Valves for HVAC Piping," Section 230523.13 "Butterfly Valves for HVAC Piping," Section 230523.14 "Check Valves for HVAC Piping," and Section 230523.15 "Gate Valves for HVAC Piping."
Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
R. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated.
S. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 21 13 - 7
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
T. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for identifying piping.
U. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.
V. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
3.3 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.
B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.
C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric nipples.
D. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.
3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Comply with requirements in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for hanger, support, and anchor devices. Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of supports.
B. Comply with requirements in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC" for seismic restraints.
C. Install the following pipe attachments:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long.
2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or longer.
3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer, supported on a trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
5. Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe.
6. On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from scratching pipe.
D. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet.
2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet.
3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet.
4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet.
5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet.
6. NPS 3 and Larger: Maximum span, 12 feet.
E. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 21 13 - 8
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
3. NPS 1-1/4Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
4. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
5. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
6. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
7. NPS 3 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
F. Plastic Piping Hanger Spacing: Space hangers according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions for service conditions. Avoid point loading. Space and install hangers with the fewest practical rigid anchor points.
G. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors.
3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
C. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
D. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M.
E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
F. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.
G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
H. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.
2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join ASTM D 1785 schedule number, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
4. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
I. Mechanically Formed, Copper-Tube-Outlet Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and procedure, and brazed joints.
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 21 13 - 9
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
3.6 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections.
B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.
C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required.
D. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections.
Comply with requirements in Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."
3.7 CHEMICAL TREATMENT
A. Perform an analysis of makeup water to determine type and quantities of chemical treatment needed to keep system free of scale, corrosion, and fouling.
B. Install bypass chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated.
1. Install in upright position with top of funnel not more than 48 inches above the floor.
2. Install feeder in minimum NPS 3/4 bypass line, from main with full-size, full-port, ball valve in the main between bypass connections.
3. Install NPS 3/4 pipe from chemical feeder drain to nearest equipment drain and include a full-size, full-port, ball valve.
C. Fill system with fresh water and add liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove grease and petroleum products from piping. Circulate solution for a minimum of 24 hours, drain, clean strainer screens, and refill with fresh water.
D. Add initial chemical treatment and maintain water quality in ranges noted above for the first year of operation.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:
1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.
2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.
3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace strainer screens.
4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.
5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.
B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:
HYDRONIC PIPING
23 21 13 - 10
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.
2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air.
Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.
3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water.
4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test.
Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times the "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."
5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
6. Prepare written report of testing.
C. Perform the following before operating the system:
1. Open manual valves fully.
2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation.
3. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure.
4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).
5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers, cooling towers, to specified values.
7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.
END OF SECTION 23 21 13
HYDRONIC PIPING AND VALVES
23 21 13.1-1
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
SECTION 23 21 13.1
HYDRONIC VALVES AND SPECIALITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes piping, special-duty valves, and hydronic specialties for hot-water heating, chilled-water cooling, process cooling loops, and condenser water systems; makeup water for these systems; blowdown drain lines; and condensate drain piping.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC" for general piping materials and installation requirements.
2. Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC" for pipe supports, product descriptions, and installation requirements. Hanger and support spacing is specified in this Section.
3. Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC" for labeling and identifying hydronic piping.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for valves, diverting fittings, manual calibrated balancing valves, and automatic flow-control valves.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, special pipe support assemblies, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and their attachment to the building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.
C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
D. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section. Include the following:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.
E. Maintenance Data: For hydronic specialties and special-duty valves to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 01.
F. Piping, fittings, and accessories: For each type of materials indicated, including gaskets.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Delete paragraph below if no welding. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate
HYDRONIC PIPING AND VALVES
23 21 13.1-2
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of hydronic piping and suspension system components with other construction, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for foundation wall penetrations.
C. Coordinate piping installation with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
Roof specialties are specified in Division 07 Sections.
D. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.
E. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03 Sections.
F. Coordinate installation of pipe sleeves for penetrations through exterior walls and floor assemblies. Coordinate with requirements for firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for fire and smoke wall and floor assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Manual Calibrated Balancing Valves:
a. Griswold Controls.
b. Or approved equal.
2. Pressure-Reducing Valves:
a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
b. Hersey
c. Febco
d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Watts Regulators.
e. Or approved equal.
3. Safety Valves:
a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
b. ITT McDonnell & Miller Div.; ITT Fluid Technology Corp. c. Kunkle Valve Division.
d. Spence Engineering Company, Inc.
e. Or approved equal.
4. Automatic Flow-Control Valves:
a. Griswold Controls.
b. Or approved equal.
5. Expansion Tanks:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
HYDRONIC PIPING AND VALVES
23 21 13.1-3
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
c. Taco, Inc.
d. Wheatley
e. Or approved equal.
6. Air Separators and Air Purgers:
a. Spiro Research Company; Spirotherm, Inc.
b. Or approved equal.
2.2 PIPING MATERIALS
A. General: Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe and fitting materials.
2.3 VALVES
A. Ball Valves: (Sizes NPS ½”– 2”, typical)
1. Ball valves (1/2”-2”), shall be two-piece style, full port, bronze body (ASTM B62 or B584) with type 316 SS ball & stem and PTFE (or RPTFE) seats and seals.
Valves shall be rated for 600 psig WOG & 150 psig SWP (non-shock). All valves shall have adjustable packing glands and blow-out proof (internally retained) stems and shall comply with the latest edition of MSS-SP-110. Threaded end (FNPT) ball valves only; use male adapters where required in soldered end applications. Supply valves with stem extensions which clear 2” of piping insulation when installed in insulated services.
a. Conbraco Industries, Inc; Apollo Division figure 77-140. b. Milwaukee Valve figure BA400S.
c. Hammond Valve figure 8303A.
d. Nibco figure T-585-70-66.
e. Or approved equal.
B. AWWA, Cast-Iron Gate Valves for non hot water applications:
1. Manufacturers:
a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; American Flow Control Div. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
c. Grinnell Corporation; Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. d. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa).
e. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
f. McWane, Inc.; M&H Valve Company Division
g. NIBCO INC.
h. United States Pipe and Foundry Company.
i. Or approved equal.
2. Nonrising-Stem, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves: AWWA C509, gray- or ductile- iron body and bonnet; with bronze or gray- or ductile-iron gate, resilient seats, bronze stem, and stem nut.
a. Minimum Working Pressure: 200 psig.
b. End Connections: Mechanical joint, or flanged.
c. Interior and Exterior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550, epoxy.
C. Cast-Iron Gate Valves for hot water applications:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Type I, Cast-Iron, Rising-Stem Gate Valves:
1) Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
HYDRONIC PIPING AND VALVES
23 21 13.1-4
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
2) Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
3) Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
4) Milwaukee Valve Company.
5) NIBCO INC.
6) Powell, Wm. Co.
7) Walworth Co.
8) Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
9) Or approved equal.
2. Cast-Iron Gate Valves, General: MSS SP-70, Type I.
a. Class 125, OS&Y, Cast-Iron Gate Valves: Cast-iron body with bronze trim, renewable bronze seat rings, rising stem, and tapered solid-wedge disc.
D. Check Valves:
1. Sizes NPS ¾”– 2”: Ball-Check, spring type, Class 150, MSS-SP-80, two-piece bronze body and seat, full port, blowout proof, threaded ends, stainless steel ball, stem, and spring, Teflon elastomers, Buna-N disc.
a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
c. NIBCO INC. T-585-70-IC.
d. Or approved equal.
2. Sizes NPS 2½”- larger: Swing Check, Type 1, Class 125, MSS-SP-71, cast-iron body, flanged with bronze seat and bronze trim, bolted cap. a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. 373.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. G931.
c. NIBCO INC. F-918-B.
d. Or approved equal.
3. Sizes NPS ¾” – 2”: Non-slam Check, Class 125, bronze body and seat, tight shut-off, threaded ends. Rated for 200 F applications. a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. 62-100.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
c. NIBCO INC. T-480.
d. Or approved equal.
4. Sizes NPS 2½”-larger: Non-slam Check, Type 1, Class 125, MSS-SP-71, cast- iron body, flanged with bronze seat and bronze trim, bolted cap. a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
c. NIBCO INC. F-910.
d. Or approved equal.
E. Carbon Steel Butterfly Valves:
1. Sizes 14” and – larger: 150 psig CWP rating, MSS SP-67, Type I, Carbon Steel Construction, tight shutoff, flanged type with one piece stem, 200° F. rating, 316 stainless steel disc and shaft or bronze disc with 416 stainless steel shaft, PTFE coated stainless bearing, EPDM shaft seal, PTFE shaft seal for NPS 24 and larger, EPDM seat material, with manual sintered bronze gear operator, and handwheel.
a. General Signal; DeZurik Unit. BAW.
b. Henry J. Pratt Company: 2FII.
c. Or approved equal.
HYDRONIC PIPING AND VALVES
23 21 13.1-5
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
F. Manual Calibrated Balancing Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body, ball type, 125- psig working pressure, 250 deg F maximum operating temperature, and having threaded ends. Valves shall have calibrated orifice or venturi, connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral seals, and be equipped with a memory stop to retain manually set position.
G. Manual Calibrated Balancing Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Cast-iron or steel body, ball type, 125-psig working pressure, 250 deg F maximum operating temperature, and having flanged or grooved connections. Valves shall have calibrated orifice or venturi, connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral seals, and be equipped with a memory stop to retain manually set position.
H. Pressure-Reducing Valves: Diaphragm-operated, bronze or brass body with low inlet pressure check valve, inlet strainer removable without system shutdown, and noncorrosive valve seat and stem. Select valve size, capacity, and operating pressure to suit system. Valve shall be factory set at operating pressure and have capability for field adjustment.
I. Safety Valves: Diaphragm-operated, bronze or brass body with brass and rubber, wetted, internal working parts; shall suit system pressure and heat capacity and shall comply with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV.
J. Automatic Flow- Limiting Device: factory set to maintain constant flow with plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure fluctuations, and equipped with test probes. Each valve shall have an identification tag outside of insulation attached by chain, and be factory marked with the zone identification, valve number, and flow rate. The body shall bear factory standard product tag. Valve shall be line size and one of the following designs depending on the system:
1. Gray-iron or brass body, designed for 175 psig at 200 deg F with stainless-steel cartridge/piston and spring.
2. Brass body, designed for 175 psig at 200 deg F with stainless-steel cartridge/piston and spring.
K. Pressure Sustaining and Pressure Regulating Valve: The valve shall be hydraulically operated, single diaphragm-actuated, globe or angle pattern. The valve shall consist of three major components: the body with seat installed, the cover with bearings installed, and the diaphragm assembly. The diaphragm assembly shall be the only moving part and shall form a sealed chamber in the upper portion of the valve, separating operating pressure from line pressure.
1. Valve body shall be of cast Ductile Iron material and have stainless steel trim.
2. The valve shall contain a resilient, synthetic rubber disc, with a rectangular cross- section contained on three and one-half sides by a disc retainer and forming a tight seal against a single removable seat insert.
3. The diaphragm assembly containing a non-magnetic 303 stainless steel stem of sufficient diameter to withstand high hydraulic pressures shall be fully guided at both ends by a bearing in the valve cover and an integral bearing in the valve seat. The seat shall be a solid, one-piece design and shall have a minimum of a five-degree taper on the seating surface for a positive, drip-tight shut off.
4. The pressure reducing pilot control shall be a direct-acting, adjustable, spring- loaded, normally open, diaphragm valve with stainless steel trim designed to permit flow when controlled pressure is less than the spring setting. The pilot control is held open by the force of the compression on the spring above the diaphragm and it closes when the delivery pressure acting on the underside of
HYDRONIC PIPING AND VALVES
23 21 13.1-6
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
the diaphragm exceeds the spring setting. The pilot control system shall include a fixed orifice. The pilot system shall include an opening speed control on all valves 3” and smaller on the model 92-01 and 4” and smaller on the model 692- 01, as standard equipment. The pilot control shall have a second downstream sensing port which can be utilized to install a pressure gauge.
5. The pressure sustaining pilot control shall be a direct-acting adjustable spring loaded control which opens when upstream pressure exceeds the spring setting on the pilot. The pilot control system shall include an X44A strainer & orifice assembly.
6. A full range of spring settings shall be available in ranges of 0 to 450 psi.
Downstream spring range shall be 2-30 psi.
7. A direct factory representative shall be made available for start-up service, inspection and necessary adjustments.
8. The valve shall be a Cla-Val Co. Model No. 750-01 Combination Pressure Reducing & Sustaining Valve as manufactured by Cla-Val Co., Newport Beach, CA 92659-0325 or equal.
L. Refer to Part 3 “Valve Applications” Article for applications of each valve.
M. Combination duty type valves and fittings shall not be used.
N. Combination Assemblies: Individual threaded components, ball valves, control valve, automatic flow limiting device of brass body construction, fitted with pressure and temperature test valves, strainer, flexible hoses, and designed for 300 psig at 250 deg F for duct or terminal mounted heating coils.
2.4 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
A. Manual Air Vent Bronze body ball valve with stainless steel ball; NPS ½.
B. Automatic Air Vent: Designed to vent automatically with float principle; bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150-psig working pressure; 240 deg F operating temperature; with NPS 1/4 discharge connection and NPS 1/2 inlet connection. Provide only one automatic air vent in system at air separator.
C. Expansion Tanks: Welded carbon steel, rated for 125-psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating temperature with rustproof coating. Separate air charge from system water to maintain design expansion capacity by a flexible diaphragm securely sealed into tank. Include drain fitting and taps for pressure gage and air-charging fitting.
Support vertical tanks with steel legs or base; support horizontal tanks with steel saddles.
Factory fabricate and test tank with taps and supports installed and labeled according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1, shipped with minimum of 12 psig charge.
D. Air Separators: Welded black steel; ASME constructed and labeled for 150 psig minimum working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating temperature; tangential Viton seal and O-ring brass vent head and skim valve, copper coalescing medium, non- ferrous float, in-line inlet and outlet connections; threaded connections for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged connections for NPS 2-1/2 and larger; threaded blowdown connection.
Provide units in sizes for full-system flow capacity with pressure loss performance of less than one foot of water, and maximum velocity of 4 feet per second, as manufactured by Spirotherm, or equal as manufactured by others with greater than line size inlet as required to meet performance requirement of less than one foot of water at design flow capacity.
HYDRONIC PIPING AND VALVES
23 21 13.1-7
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
E. Y-Pattern Strainers NPS 2 and smaller:
1. Strainers 2" and smaller for heating and air conditioning water service shall be based on Watts No. 777 or an equivalent strainer by Armstrong or equal, 400 psig WOG bronze body, threaded, Y-pattern, 20-mesh stainless steel screen, with a full size drain connection and ball valve.
F. Y-Pattern Strainers NPS 2-1/2 and larger:
1. Strainers 2-1/2" and larger for heating and air conditioning water service shall be based on Watts No. 77F-DI, Keckely Style “A”, or an equivalent strainer by Armstrong or equal, Class 125 cast-iron body, flanged, Y-pattern, stainless steel screen, with a drain connection and ball valve (as described elsewhere herein).
G. Suction Diffuser: Angle or straight pattern, 175-psig pressure rating, cast-iron body and end cap, pump-inlet fitting; with bronze startup and bronze or stainless-steel permanent strainers; bronze or stainless-steel straightening vanes; drain plug; and factory- or field- fabricated support.
2.5 CONNECTORS
A. Stainless-Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors:
1. Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective jacket.
2. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected.
3. Performance: Capable of 3/4-inch misalignment.
4. CWP Rating: 150 psig.
5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
B. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors:
1. Body: Fiber-reinforced rubber body.
2. End Connections: Steel flanges drilled to align with Classes 150 and 300 steel flanges.
3. Performance: Capable of misalignment.
4. CWP Rating: 150 psig.
5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Hot Water Heating and Chilled Water (above ground):
1. NPS 2 and smaller: Type L copper; with 95-5 soldered wrought copper fittings.
2. NPS 2-1/2 and larger: Black steel pipe, ASTM A53, Type S (seamless) or Type ERW (welded); with standard weight ASTM A234 forged steel fittings for butt- weld connection or 150 lb; or grooved mechanical joint coupling and fittings with roll grooved mechanical joints.
B. Heating and Chilled Water Pot Feeder:
1. Type L Copper: Type L copper: with 95-5 soldered wrought copper fittings.
C. Equipment Connections
1. NPS 2 and smaller: Use union connections.
2. NPS 2-1/2 and larger: Use flange connections.
HYDRONIC PIPING AND VALVES
23 21 13.1-8
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
3. Dissimilar metals: Where piping is connected to equipment with different materials, such as ferrous to copper, use brass union, brass coupler, brass pipe/nipple in order to prevent electrolysis.
4. Valves: Provide shut-off duty isolation valves and strainers at all equipment.
5. Flexible Piping Connectors: Provide flexible piping connectors at each piece of equipment unless acoustic consultant determines such devices are not required to meet project sound and vibration performance requirements.
D. Condensate Drain Lines: Type L drawn-temper copper tubing with soldered joints.
3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. General-Duty Valve Applications for hydronic systems unless otherwise noted, use the following valve types:
Type Minimum
Size
Maximum
Size
Valve Service:
Ball 1/2” 2 ” Shut-off, and Throttling duty.
Gate, AWWA (chilled water) 2½” 12” Shut-off duty.
Butterfly (chilled water only) 14” n/a Shut-off duty.
Gate, rising stem (hot water) 2½” n/a Shut-off duty.
Ball - Check (hot water) ¾” 2” Check valve.
B. Install main building shut-off valves for hydronic systems.
C. Install shutoff duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at supply connection to each piece of equipment, unless only one piece of equipment is connected in the branch line.
D. Install auto flow limiting balancing valves in the return water line of each heating or cooling element. Install manual calibrated balancing valve at split coils as shown on the drawings.
E. Reheat Coils: Provide combination assemblies as described in Part 2, with flow limiting device and flexible hose connections.
F. Hydronic systems which utilize flow limiting devices as balancing means shall include flow limiting devices on all system user branch take-off’s at heat exchange device for system uniformity and proper system balance and operation.
G. Combination duty type valves and fittings shall not be used.
H. See Division 23 Section “Instrumentation and Controls” for hydronic control valve requirements.
I. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.
HYDRONIC PIPING AND VALVES
23 21 13.1-9
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
J. Install safety valves on hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install safety-valve discharge piping, without valves, to floor. Comply with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements.
K. Install pressure-reducing valves on hot-water generators and elsewhere as required to regulate system pressure.
L. All water valves operating between 32 and 95 F and larger than 2” shall be AWWA C-509 epoxy coated gate valves. Where the valves are insulated to prevent sweating (e.g. chilled water) the valves shall be non-rising stem. Other applications may be either rising stem or non-rising stem as required. Except where buried outside, the valves shall have handwheels. Buried valves shall have 2” square operating nut.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC" for basic piping installation requirements.
B. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.
C. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.
D. Install piping level or at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent in direction of flow or a drain.
E. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up- top flat.
F. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the takeoff coming out the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, install the takeoff coming out the top of the main pipe.
G. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2.
H. Anchor piping for proper direction of expansion and contraction.
I. Do not use groove-joint fittings on insulated piping system, unless insulation system is specifically designed for groove-joint fittings.
J. Avoid underground piping.
K. Piping penetrations shall be carefully detailed. Insulation through penetrations shall be continuous.
L. Bushings and short nipples shall not be used.
M. Avoid pipe joints located over, or within 2 feet of electrical equipment. If it cannot be avoided provide with drip pans.
HYDRONIC PIPING AND VALVES
23 21 13.1-10
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
N. Teflon tape shall be utilized for threaded pipe joints.
O. Provide pipe and fittings of similar materials so dielectric fittings are not needed; i.e. only brass and bronze fittings with copper piping.
P. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings and Couplings:
1. Piping shall be roll grooved only. Cut groove piping is not allowed.
2. Gaskets shall be EPDM.
3. Install per manufacturer’s installation instructions.
3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC" for joint construction requirements for soldered and brazed joints in copper tubing; threaded, welded, and flanged joints in steel piping.
3.5 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.
B. Install one automatic air vent per system in mechanical equipment rooms only at air separator for system air venting.
C. Install in-line air separators in pump suction lines. Install drain valve on units NPS 2 and larger.
D. Install expansion tanks on floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure tank is properly charged with air to suit system design requirements.
E. Provide pot-feeder in heating systems and only in non-central plant chilled water systems.
3.6 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Size for supply and return piping connections shall be same as for equipment connections.
B. Install shut-off valves, strainers, accessories, and flexible hose threaded connections.
C. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.
D. Never install bypass piping around control valves.
E. Install ports for pressure and temperature gages at coil inlet connections.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:
1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.
2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.
HYDRONIC PIPING AND VALVES
23 21 13.1-11
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.
4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.
5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.
B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:
1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium.
2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release trapped air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of liquid.
3. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that system is full of water.
4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test at 150 PSI or 1.5 times the design pressure, whichever is greater, for four hours. There shall be no decrease in pressure over the four hour test period. Isolate equipment subject to damage from test pressure. Make no test against a service valve or meter. Isolate from the system all existing piping and new or existing equipment that may be damaged by test pressure. Test only new piping unless instructed otherwise.
Final connection between new and existing piping shall be tested at normal system operating pressures and monitored for leaks for three working days.
Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."
5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage throughout the testing period. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
6. Prepare written report of testing.
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Perform these adjustments before operating the system:
1. Open valves to fully open position.
2. Check pump for proper direction of rotation.
3. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure.
4. Check air vent at air separator and determine if it is operating freely (automatic type).
5. Check air vents at high points of system and bleed air completely (manual type).
6. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
7. Check and set operating temperatures of heating and chilled water systems to design requirements.
8. Lubricate motors and bearings.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove and clean or replace strainer screens. After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping systems, but before balancing, remove disposable fine-mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers.
END OF SECTION 23 21 13.1
AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS
23 64 23.13 - 1
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
SECTION 23 64 23.13
AIR-COOLED WATER CHILLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes packaged, air-cooled, electric-motor-driven, scroll water chillers.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BAS: Building automation system.
B. COP: Coefficient of performance. The ratio of the rate of heat removal to the rate of energy input using consistent units for any given set of rating conditions.
C. DDC: Direct digital control.
D. EER: Energy-efficiency ratio. The ratio of the cooling capacity given in Btu/h to the total power input given in watts at any given set of rating conditions.
E. GFI: Ground fault interrupt.
F. IPLV: Integrated part-load value. A single-number part-load efficiency figure of merit for a single chiller calculated per the method defined by AHRI 550/590 and referenced to AHRI standard rating conditions.
G. I/O: Input/output.
H. kW/Ton: The ratio of total power input of the chiller in kilowatts to the net refrigerating capacity in tons at any given set of rating conditions.
I. NPLV: Nonstandard part -load value. A single number part -load efficiency figure of merit for a single chiller calculated per the method defined by AHRI 550/590 and intended for operating conditions other than the AHRI standard rating conditions.
J. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.
K. TEAO: Totally enclosed air over.
L. TENV: Totally enclosed nonventilating.
AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS
23 64 23.13 - 2
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include refrigerant, rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
2. Performance at AHRI standard conditions and at conditions indicated.
3. Performance at AHRI standard unloading conditions.
4. Minimum evaporator flow rate.
5. Refrigerant capacity of water chiller.
6. Fluid capacity of evaporator.
7. Characteristics of safety relief valves.
B. Shop Drawings: Complete set of manufacturer's prints of water chiller assemblies, control panels, sections and elevations, and unit isolation. Include the following:
1. Assembled unit dimensions.
2. Weight and load distribution.
3. Required clearances for maintenance and operation.
4. Size and location of piping and wiring connections.
5. Diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings:
1. Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
a. Structural supports.
b. Piping roughing-in requirements.
c. Wiring roughing-in requirements, including spaces reserved for electrical equipment.
d. Access requirements, including working clearances for mechanical controls and electrical equipment, and tube pull and service clearances.
2. Coordination drawings showing plan, section and elevation views, drawn to ¼” = 1’-0”.
3. Each view to show screened background with the following:
a. Column grids, beams, columns, and concrete housekeeping pads. b. Layout with walls, floors, and roofs, including each room name and number.
c. Equipment and products of other trades that are located in vicinity of chillers and part of final installation, such as plumbing systems.
B. Certificates: For certification required in "Quality Assurance" Article.
C. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for water chillers, accessories, and components, from manufacturers.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS
23 64 23.13 - 3
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.
D. Installation instructions.
E. Source quality-control reports.
F. Startup service reports.
G. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each water chiller to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
B. Spare Parts List: Recommended spare parts list with quantity for each.
C. Touchup Paint Description: Detailed description of paint used in application of finish coat to allow for procurement of a matching paint.
D. Instructional Videos: Including those that are prerecorded and those that are recorded during training.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Unit shall be rated in accordance with AHRI (Air -Conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute) Standard 550/590, latest edition (U.S.A.) and all units shall be ASHRAE (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers) 90.1-2019 compliant.
B. Unit construction shall comply with ASHRAE 15 Safety Code, UL (Underwriters Laboratories) latest edition, and ASME (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) applicable codes (U.S.A. codes).
C. The management system governing the manufacture of this product is ISO (International Organization for Standardization) 9001:2015 certified.
D. An operational test, in which the chiller is run under load, is performed at the factory. This test checks for proper operation of fans as well as various controls and safeties, and a Certificate of Unit Testing, indicating successful end-of-line testing, is provided with the unit.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Ship water chillers from the factory fully charged with refrigerant.
B. Unit controls shall be capable of withstanding 150°F (66°C) storage temperatures in the control compartment.
AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS
23 64 23.13 - 4
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
C. Unit shall be stored and handled per unit manufacturer's recommendations.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Standard Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of chillers that fail in materials or workmanship within 12 months from date of chiller startup or 18 months from the date of shipment, whichever occurs first.
B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of water chillers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Extended warranties include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Complete chiller including refrigerant charge.
b. Complete compressor and drive assembly including refrigerant charge. c. Refrigerant charge.
1) Loss of refrigerant charge for any reason due to manufacturer's product defect and product installation.
d. Parts only.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of shipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Scroll water chillers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
2. Component Importance Factor: 1.0.
B. Site Altitude: Chiller shall be suitable for altitude at which installed without affecting performance indicated. Make adjustments to affected chiller components to account for site altitude.
C. AHRI Rating: Rate water chiller performance according to requirements in AHRI 550/590.
D. ASHRAE Compliance: ASHRAE 15 for safety code for mechanical refrigeration.
E. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
F. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and stamp water chiller heat exchangers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS
23 64 23.13 - 5
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
G. Comply with NFPA 70.
H. Comply with requirements of UL 1995, "Heating and Cooling Equipment," and include label by a qualified testing agency showing compliance.
I. Operation Following Loss of Normal Power:
1. Equipment, associated factory - and field -installed controls, and associated electrical equipment and power supply connected to backup power system shall automatically return equipment and associated controls to the operating state occurring immediately before loss of normal power without need for manual intervention by an operator when power is restored either through a backup power source, or through normal power if restored before backup power is brought on-line.
2. See drawings for equipment served by backup power systems.
3. Provide means and methods required to satisfy requirement even if not explicitly indicated.
J. Outdoor Installations:
1. Chiller shall be suitable for outdoor installation indicated.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Carrier
B. Trane
2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Description: Microprocessor controlled, air -cooled liquid chiller for outdoor installation, utilizing scroll compressors, low sound fans, electronic expansion valve, optional hydronic pump system and fluid storage tank.
For units that incorporate Greenspeed intelligence, all fans are controlled with variable speed fan drive motors. Chiller software shall be specifically developed to coordinate optimal fan speed for application conditions and provide refrigerant circuit optimization, resulting in higher part load efficiency and reduced acoustic levels Retain "Sound-Reduction Package" Paragraph below for projects with stringent acoustical requirements. Sound -reduction packages are typically an optional feature.
2.4 EQUIPMENT
A. General:
1. Factory assembled, single -piece chassis, air -cooled liquid chiller. Contained within the unit cabinet shall be all factory wiring, piping, controls, refrigerant charge (R-32), and special features required prior to field start-up.
AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS
23 64 23.13 - 6
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
B. Materials of Construction:
1. Frame shall be of heavy-gauge, galvanized steel.
2. Exterior panels shall be galvanized steel with a baked enamel powder or pre - painted finish.
3. Painted parts shall withstand 1000 hours in constant neutral salt spray under ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) B117 conditions with a 1 mm scribe per ASTM D1654. After test, painted parts shall show no signs of wrinkling or cracking, no loss of adhesion, no evidence of blistering, and the mean creepage shall not exceed 1/4 in. (Rating ³ per ASTM D1654) on either side of the scribe line.
C. Fans:
1. Standard condenser fans shall be direct -driven (VFD [variable frequency drive] controlled on units with Greenspeed intelligence), 9 -blade airfoil cross -section, reinforced polymer construction, shrouded -axial type, and shall be statically and dynamically balanced with inherent corrosion resistance.
2. The variable speed drives for the condenser fans on 30RC units with Greenspeed intelligence shall include a DC link reactor.
3. Fan operation shall allow reduced sound levels during scheduled unoccupied operating periods. Manufacturers without unoccupied reduced sound capability shall submit 1/3 octave band data and sound power data as measured according to AHRI 370 as confirmation of unit sound characteristics.
4. Air shall be discharged vertically upward.
5. Fans shall be protected by coated steel wire safety guards.
6. Fan blades shall have serrated edges to minimize the sound that is produced.
D. Compressor/Compressor Assembly:
1. Fully hermetic, direct-drive, scroll-type com-pressors.
2. Compressor motors shall be cooled by refrigerant gas passing through motor windings and shall have either internal line break thermal and current overload protection or external current overload modules with compressor temperature sensors.
3. Compressors shall be mounted on rubber in shear vibration isolators.
4. Staging of compressors shall provide unloading capability. Digital compressor unloading control shall be available as an option.
E. Brazed Plate Evaporator:
1. Evaporator shall be rated for a refrigerant working -side pressure of 710 psig (4895 kPa) and shall be tested for a maximum water -side pressure of 300 psig (2068 kPa) or 150 psig (1034 kPa) when optional hydronic package is installed.
2. Shall be single -pass, ANSI (American National Standards Institute) type 316 stainless steel, brazed plate construction.
3. Shell shall be insulated with 3/4-in. (19 mm) closed -cell, polyvinyl-chloride foam with a maximum K factor of 0.28.
4. Shall incorporate 2 independent refrigerant circuits on sizes 035 to 060; sizes 010 to 030 shall have one independent refrigerant circuit.
5. Evaporator shall have factory-installed heater, to protect Evaporator from ambient temperature freeze down to –20°F (–29°C). Unit shall be provided with a factory - installed flow switch.
6. All connections shall use standard Victaulic-type fittings.
7. Evaporator shall be supplied with a 20 mesh strainer.
AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS
23 64 23.13 - 7
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
F. Condenser:
1. Coil shall be air -cooled Novation® heat exchanger technology with microchannel (MCHX) coils and shall have a series of flat tubes containing a series of multiple, parallel flow microchannels layered between the refrigerant manifolds.
2. Coils shall consist of a two -pass arrangement. Coil construction shall consist of aluminum alloys for fins, tubes, and manifolds in combination with a corrosion - resistant coating.
3. Tubes shall be cleaned, dehydrated, and sealed.
4. Assembled condenser coils shall be leak tested and pressure tested at 656 psig (4522 kPa).
G. Refrigeration Components:
1. Refrigerant circuit components shall include filter drier, moisture indicating sight glass, electronic expansion device and complete operating charge of both refrigerant R -32 and compressor oil. Per Department of Transportation regulations, when any A2L refrigerant is employed, there must be a suction service valve on any chiller containing a charge of 20 kg or more. Therefore, a suction service valve is included on all 30RC035 -060 chillers which employ Al/Cu coils.
H. Controls, Safeties, and Diagnostics:
1. Unit controls shall include the following minimum components:
a. Microprocessor with non -volatile memory. Battery backup system shall not be accepted.
b. Separate terminal block for power and controls.
c. Control transformer to serve all controllers, relays, and control components.
d. ON/OFF control switch.
e. Replaceable solid-state controllers.
f. Pressure sensors shall be installed to measure suction and discharge pressure for each circuit. Thermistors shall be installed to measure evaporator entering and leaving fluid temperatures, outdoor ambient temperature, and discharge temperature.
2. Unit controls shall include the following functions:
a. Automatic circuit primary/secondary for dual circuit chillers. b. Hermetic scroll compressors are maintenance free and protected by an auto-adaptive control that minimizes compressor wear.
c. Capacity control based on leaving chilled fluid temperature and compensated by rate of change of return -fluid temperature with temperature set point accuracy to 0.1°F (0.06°C).
d. Limiting the chilled fluid temperature pull -down rate at start -up to an adjustable range of 0.2°F to 2°F (0.11°C to 1.1°C) per minute to prevent excessive demand spikes at start-up.
e. Seven-day time schedule.
f. Leaving chilled fluid temperature reset from return fluid and outside air temperature.
g. Chilled water pump start/stop control and primary/standby sequencing to ensure equal pump run time.
AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS
23 64 23.13 - 8
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
h. Dual chiller control for parallel chiller applications without addition of hardware modules and control panels (additional thermistors and wells are required).
i. Timed maintenance scheduling to signal maintenance activities for pumps, condenser coil cleanings, strainer maintenance and user -defined maintenance activities.
j. Boiler enable signal to initiate system heating mode. k. Low ambient protection to energize evaporator and hydronic system heaters.
l. Periodic pump start to ensure pump seals are properly maintained during off-season periods.
m. Single step demand limit control activated by remote contact closure. n. Nighttime sound mode to reduce the sound of the machine by a user - defined schedule.
3. Diagnostics:
a. The control panel shall include, as standard, a display:
1) Color touch screen display with stylus.
2) Display shall allow a user to navigate through menus, select desired options, and modify data.
b. Features of the display shall include:
1) Multiple connection ports for USB, Ethernet, or BACnet 1 IP, ModbusError! Reference source not found. -RTU (Remote Terminal Unit), LEN (local equipment network), and Carrier -Comfort -Network® (CCN) connections.
NOTE: BACnet IP may require -additional -programming.
2) Automatic reporting of alarms over email.
3) Ability to graphically plot trends of system performance and conditions over time.
4) Graphical summary display of current chiller operation and water conditions. 5) Display shall allow access to configuration, maintenance, service, set point, time schedules, alarm history, and status data.
6) Three levels of password protection against unauthorized access to configuration and maintenance information, and display set up parameters. 7) Full compatibility with the Carrier -Comfort Network® (CCN) system to provide email alarm notification and to provide network capability to fully - monitor and control chiller.
8) Display shall be capable of displaying the last 50 alarms, with clear full text description and time and date stamp, and will store a snapshot of operating conditions before and after the 10 most recent alarms.
9) Display run hours and number of starts for machine and individual compressors.
10) The control system shall allow software upgrade without the need for new - hardware modules.
4. Safeties:
a. Unit shall be equipped with thermistors and all necessary components in conjunction with the control system to provide the unit with the -following protections:
1Third-party trademarks and logos are the property of their respective owners.
AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS
23 64 23.13 - 9
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
1) Reverse rotation.
2) Low chilled fluid temperature.
3) Motor overtemperature.
4) High pressure.
5) Electrical overload.
6) Thermal overload.
7) Loss of refrigerant charge.
a) Condenser fan motors shall have internal -overcurrent protection.
I. Operating Characteristics:
1. Unit shall be capable of operating down to –20°F (–29°C) on size 010 and 015 units, 45°F (7.2°C) on size 020 -030 units, and 32°F (0°C) on size 035 -060 units as standard.
2. Unit sizes 020-060 are capable of lower starting and operating temperatures with the inclusion of wind baffles and high-efficiency variable condenser fans.
3. Unit shall be capable of starting and running at outdoor ambient temperatures up to 120°F (50°C) for all sizes. Unit shall additionally be able to stay online when running with a 125°F (52°C) ambient temperature.
4. Unit shall be capable of starting up with 95°F (35°C) entering fluid temperature to the evaporator.
J. Fan Motors:
1. Condenser fan motors shall be totally enclosed, air over, 3 -phase type with permanently lubricated bearings and Class F insulation. Fans shall use 8 -pole motor.
K. Electrical Requirements:
1. Unit/module primary electrical power supply shall enter the unit at a single electrical box.
2. Unit shall operate on 3 -phase power at the voltage shown in the equipment schedule.
3. Control points shall be accessed through terminal block.
4. Unit shall be shipped with factory control and power wiring installed.
5. Unit shall have a standard SCCR (short circuit current rating) of 10 kA.
L. Chilled Water Circuit:
1. Chilled water circuit shall be rated for 300 psig (2068 kPa). Units with optional pump package are rated for 150 psig (1034 kPa) working pressure.
2. Solid-state flow monitor with integral relay shall be factory installed and wired.
3. Brass body strainer with 20 mesh screen and ball type blow down.
4. Optional hydronic package (applies to all unit sizes except as noted, with or without the use of VFD [variable frequency drive]):
a. Field pipe connections shall be carbon steel Victaulic type. b. Optional single or primary/stand -by operation pump systems. Dual pump systems shall have a pump discharge check valve.
c. For dual-pump packages, the equipment shall have one pump operating, and a simple transition to the back -up pump shall be accomplished by means of a valve which shall be supplied with this configuration. d. For dual -pump packages, when servicing is required, the pump removal/installation process shall require neither the chiller to be drained
AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS
23 64 23.13 - 10
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
nor the installation of a blank flange to replace the pump vertical in -line, being removed/installed.
e. Pumps shall be single stage design, capable of being serviced without disturbing piping connections.
1) Pump casing shall be of class 30 cast iron.
2) The impeller shall be of cast bronze, closed type, dynamically balanced, keyed to the shaft and secured by locking cap screw.
3) The hydronic kit will be provided with a flush line connection to ensure lubrication at the seal face and allow for positive venting of the seal chamber.
4) Each port shall be fitted with an isolation valve that allows the units to operate in parallel or standby, yet may be used to isolate one pumping unit for servicing or removal with the other pump still -running. 5) Pump shall be rated for 150 psig (1034 kPa) working pressure. 6) The pump piping shall have gauge tappings at the suction and discharge lines and include drain ports.
7) Dual pumps shall allow for the servicing of one pump without draining the chilled water loop.
8) Motors shall be TEFC 3-phase type with grease-lubricated ball bearings. 9) Each pump shall be factory tested per Hydraulic Institute Standards. 10) Pump motors shall be VFD compatible.
f. Fluid expansion tank shall be factory installed within the chiller cabinet insulates, pre-charged and rated for a maximum working pressure of 150 psig (1034 kPa).
g. Water pressure taps (2) shall be factory installed across the evaporator and rated for 150 psig (1034 kPa).
h. Combination valve (which includes check, isolation, and modulation) shall be factory installed. Pressure/temperature taps (2) shall be factory installed to measure the pressure -differential across the combination valve.
i. Hydronic assembly shall have factory - supplied electric freeze protection to –20°F (–29°C) when optional heaters are used.
M. Special Features:
Certain standard features are not applicable when the features designated by * are specified.
For assistance in amending the specifications, contact your Carrier representative.
1. High-efficiency variable condenser fans:
All fans on the unit shall have variable speed fan motors to provide higher part load efficiency and reduced acoustic levels. Each fan circuit shall have a factory-installed, independent variable speed drive with display. Variable speed drives are rated IP -55 enclosures and UL Listed. The use of this option or accessory, with the addition of antifreeze in the evaporator circuit and wind baffles, shall allow running with outdoor ambient temperatures down to –20°F (–28.9°C). This feature is standard on sizes 010 and 015.
2. * Low-Ambient Operation:
Unit shall be capable of starting as low as and operating down to –20°F ( –29°C) with the addition of high -efficiency variable con -denser fans. In addition, adequate field -supplied antifreeze with suitable corrosion inhibitor protection shall be field -installed in the evaporator circuit. Field -installed wind baffles shall also be required. If significant low -load operation is
AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS
23 64 23.13 - 11
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
anticipated, then hot gas bypass is recommended. High -efficiency variable condenser fans are standard on sizes 010 and 015.
NOTE: The motors associated with low ambient head pressure control will be open type and shall have class B insulation.
3. Unit-Mounted Non-Fused Disconnect:
Unit shall be supplied with factory -installed, non -fused electrical disconnect for main power supply. This option shall be included with the high SCCR option.
4. Optional Condenser Coil Materials:
a. E-coated microchannel coils:
E-coated aluminum microchannel coil shall have a flexible epoxy polymer coating uniformly applied to all coil external surface areas without material bridging between fins or louvers. Coating process shall ensure complete coil encapsulation, including all exposed fin edges. E -coat shall have a thickness of
0.8 to 1.2 mil with top coat having a uniform dry film thickness from 1.0 to 2.0 mil on all external coil surface areas including fin edges. E -coated coils shall have superior hardness characteristics of 2H per ASTM D3363 -00 and cross hatch adhesion of 4B -5B per ASTM D3359 -02. Impact resistance shall be up to 160 in./lb (ASTM D2794-93). E-coated coil shall have superior impact resistance with no cracking, chipping, or peeling per NSF/ANSI 51 -2002 Method 10.2. E -coated aluminum microchannel coils shall be capable of withstanding 8,000 -hour salt spray test in accordance with the ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) B-117 Standard.
b. Aluminum fin/copper tube coils:
Coil shall be constructed of seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded to aluminum fins. Fins shall have wavy enhancements. These condenser coils are recommended with remote evaporator applications. These coils are not recommended for corrosive environments.
c. E-coated aluminum-fin coils:
Coil shall have a flexible epoxy polymer coating uniformly applied to all coil surface areas without material bridging between fins. Coating process shall ensure complete coil encapsulation. Color shall be high gloss black with gloss; 60° of 65 to 90% per ASTM ID523 -89. Uniform dry film thickness from 0.8 to 1.2 mil on all surface areas including fin edges. Superior hardness characteristics of 2H per ASTM D3363 -92A and cross hatch adhesion of 4B -5B per ASTM D3359 -93.
Impact resistance shall be up to 160 in./lb (ASTM D2794 -93). Humidity and water immersion resistance shall be up to minimum 1000 and 250 hours respectively (ASTM D2247 -92 and ASTM D870 -92). E-coated aluminum -fin coils shall be capable of withstanding 8,000 -hour salt spray test in accordance with the ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) B -117 Standard. Coil construction shall be aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes.
5. Hot Gas Bypass:
Unit shall be equipped with factory or field -installed, microprocessor -controlled, hot gas bypass that shall permit unit operation down below the minimum standard step of
AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS
23 64 23.13 - 12
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
capacity. The factory option is not available on sizes 010 and 015 or on any application with a leaving fluid temperature below 38°F (3.3°C). Option and accessory not available on units with the digital compressor option.
6. Energy Management Module:
A factory or field -installed module shall provide the following energy management capabilities: cooling set point and demand limit control; 2 -point demand limit control (from 15% to 100%) activated by a remote contact closure; discrete input for “Ice Done” indication for ice storage system interface and dual chiller leaving water temperature or chilled water reset based upon space temperature.
7. Hail Guards:
Unit shall be supplied with factory or field -installed, louvered, sheet metal panels which securely fasten to the chiller and provide condenser coil protection against hail and other physical damage. This option or accessory directly covers the coil(s) on all sizes.
8. Vibration Isolation:
Vibration isolation pads shall be supplied for field installation at unit mounting points.
Pads shall help to reduce vibration transmission into the occupied space.
9. Chilled Water Storage Tank:
a. Fluid storage tank shall be rated for a maximum of 150 psig (1034 kPa). b. Shall provide a minimum 4 gallon per ton (3.7 L per kW) fluid storage capacity. c. Shall fit under the chiller to minimize system footprint requirements. Tanks fitted outside of chiller footprint shall not be acceptable.
d. Tank shall be constructed a cold rolled carbon steel shell. e. Tank shall be insulated with 3/4-in. (19 mm) closed -cell, polyvinyl -chloride foam with a maximum K factor of 0.28.
f. Tank shall be baffled to prevent temperature stratification. g. Tank shall have Victaulic connections.
h. Tank shall have vent and drain plugs accessible from outside tank enclosure. i. Internal heaters shall provide freeze protection to –20°F ( –29°C). The included heater thermostat prevents overheating of the fluid.
10. BACnet IP:
Shall provide a factory -installed interface between the chiller and a BACnet Local Area Network (LAN) and allows integration with i -Vu® Open control system or a third -party BACnet building automation system. Field configuration is required.
11. LonWorks Translator:
Unit shall be supplied with field -installed interface between the chiller and a Local Operating Network (LON, i.e., LonWorks FT -10A ANSI/EIA -709.1). Field programming shall be required.
12. GFI Convenience Outlet:
Shall be factory or field installed to provide the chiller with a 4 amp GFI receptacle. The receptacle shall have independent fuse protection. The convenience outlet is a 115 -v female receptacle. When this item is factory -installed, remote connectivity is also included.
AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS
23 64 23.13 - 13
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
13. Compressor Blankets:
Shall provide factory or field -installed sound blankets around each compressor in conjunction with low -sound AeroAcoustic ™ fans to provide significant chiller sound reduction.
14. High SCCR (Short Circuit Current Rating):
The optional high SCCR (short circuit current rating) device shall allow the chiller to tolerate a 65 kA (208V-460V) and 25KA (575V) short circuit current for a brief period of time while protecting the downstream components. The high SCCR option shall provide a higher level of protection than the standard unit. The selection of this option includes a non-fused disconnect.
15. Digital Compressor Option:
Shall provide a factory-installed digital compressor to provide incremental steps for tighter temperature control (not available on any application with a leaving fluid temperature below 38°F [3.3°C]).
16. Remote Evaporator Kit:
Field-installed remote evaporator kit shall provide the additional hardware required to remotely mount the evaporator from the unit. There are limits to total separation of the unit to the evaporator as well as vertical separation limits, and these shall be delineated in the accessory installation instructions. Never bury refrigerant piping on these or any other applications.
17. Wind Baffles:
Wind baffles shall be field installed to facilitate operation down to –20°F ( –29°C) when used in conjunction with high-efficiency variable condenser fans.
18. Suction Line Insulation:
Shall provide a tubular, closed -cell form of insulation that is factory -installed on the chiller suction piping.
19. Phase Loss Monitor:
Shall be field installed to provide the unit with protection against phase loss.
20. Remote connectivity:
Shall be factory -installed to provide a secure cellular system which communicates operating information to a central operating site. The selection of this option automatically includes GFI convenience outlet.
2.5 INSULATION
A. Closed-cell, flexible, elastomeric thermal insulation complying with ASTM C 534/C 534M, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
1. Thickness: 3/4 inch.
AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS
23 64 23.13 - 14
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
B. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
C. Factory-applied insulation over all cold surfaces of chiller capable of forming condensation.
Components shall include, but not be limited to, evaporator, evaporator water boxes including nozzles, refrigerant suction pipe from evaporator to compressor, cold surfaces of compressor, refrigerant-cooled motor, and auxiliary piping.
1. Apply adhesive to 100 percent of insulation contact surface.
2. Before insulating steel surfaces, prepare surfaces for paint, and prime and paint as indicated for other painted components. Do not insulate unpainted steel surfaces.
3. Seal seams and joints to provide a vapor barrier.
4. After adhesive has fully cured, paint exposed surfaces of insulation to match other painted parts.
2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform functional test of water chillers before shipping.
B. Factory test and inspect evaporator according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section VIII, Division 1. Stamp with ASME label.
C. For water chillers located outdoors, rate sound power level according to AHRI 370 procedure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Before water chiller installation, examine roughing -in for equipment support, anchor -bolt sizes and locations, piping, controls, and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other conditions affecting water chiller performance, maintenance, and operations.
1. Water chiller locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact locations before roughing-in for piping, controls, and electrical connections.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 WATER CHILLER INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into concrete bases.
B. Coordinate sizes, locations, and anchoring attachments of structural -steel support structures with actual equipment provided.
C. Install water chillers on support structure indicated.
D. Equipment Mounting:
AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS
23 64 23.13 - 15
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
1. Install water chillers on cast -in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in [ Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." ] [ Section 033053 "Miscellaneous Cast -in-Place Concrete."]
2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic -control devices specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."
3. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 230548.13 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."
E. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.
F. Maintain clearances required by governing code.
G. Chiller manufacturer's factory -trained service personnel shall charge water chiller with refrigerant if not factory charged.
H. Install separate devices furnished by manufacturer and not factory installed.
1. Chillers shipped in multiple major assemblies shall be field assembled by chiller manufacturer's factory-trained service personnel.
3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" and Section 232116 "Hydronic Piping Specialties." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Comply with requirements in Section 232300 "Refrigerant Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
C. Where installing piping adjacent to chillers, allow space for service and maintenance.
D. Evaporator Fluid Connections:
1. Connect to evaporator inlet with shutoff valve, strainer, flexible connector, thermometer, and plugged tee with pressure gage.
2. Connect to evaporator outlet with shutoff valve, balancing valve, flexible connector, flow switch, thermometer, plugged tee with pressure gage, flow meter, and drain connection with valve.
3. Make connections to water chiller with a mechanical coupling.
E. Connect each chiller vent connection with an automatic vent, full size of vent connection.
3.4 ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTIONS
A. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
B. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS
23 64 23.13 - 16
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
C. Provide nameplate for each electrical connection indicating electrical equipment designation and circuit number feeding connection. Nameplate shall be laminated phenolic layers of black with engraved white letters at least 1/2 inch high. Locate nameplate where easily visible.
3.5 CONTROLS CONNECTIONS
A. Install control and electrical power wiring to field-mounted control devices.
B. Connect control wiring between chillers and other equipment to interlock operation as required to provide a complete and functioning system.
C. Connect control wiring between chiller control interface and DDC system for remote monitoring and control of chillers. Comply with requirements in Section 230923 "Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC."
D. Provide nameplate on face of chiller control panel indicating control equipment designation serving chiller and the I/O point designation for each control connection. Nameplate shall be laminated phenolic layers of black with engraved white letters at least 1/2 inch high.
3.6 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
B. Inspect field -assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical connections for proper assemblies, installations, and connections.
C. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and perform the following:
1. Verify that refrigerant charge is sufficient and water chiller has been leak tested.
2. Verify that pumps are installed and functional.
3. Verify that thermometers and gages are installed.
D. Visually inspect chiller for damage before starting. Repair or replace damaged components, including insulation. Do not start chiller until damage that is detrimental to operation has been corrected.
E. Prepare a written startup report that records results of tests and inspections.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain water chillers.
1. Instructor shall be factory trained and certified.
2. Train personnel in operation and maintenance and to obtain maximum efficiency in plant operation.
3. Provide instructional videos showing general operation and maintenance that are coordinated with operation and maintenance manuals.
4. Obtain Owner sign-off that training is complete.
5. Owner training shall be held at Project site.
AIR COOLED WATER CHILLERS
23 64 23.13 - 17
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
END OF SECTION 23 64 23.13
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 19 - 1
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
SECTION 26 05 19
L
OW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Copper building wire.
2. Connectors and splices.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Copper building wire.
2. Connectors and splices.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COPPER BUILDING WIRE
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. General Cable; Prysmian Group North America.
2. Service Wire Co.
3. Southwire Company, LLC.
B. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn copper current-carrying conductor with an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less.
C. Standards:
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.
D. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B8 ASTM B496 for stranded conductors.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 19 - 2
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
E. Conductor Insulation:
1. Type THWN-2. Comply with UL 83.
2. Type THW-2. Comply with NEMA WC-70/ICEA S-95-658 and UL 83.
3. Type XHHW-2. Comply with UL 44.
2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors, splices, and lugs of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.
B. Jacketed Cable Connectors: For steel and aluminum jacketed cables, zinc die-cast with set screws, designed to connect conductors specified in this Section.
C. Lugs: One piece, seamless, designed to terminate conductors specified in this Section.
1. Material: Copper.
2. Type: One hole with standard barrels.
3. Termination: Compression.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Feeders:
1. Copper; stranded for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
2. Copper for feeders smaller than No. 4 AWG; copper or aluminum for feeders No. 4 AWG and larger. Conductors must be stranded for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
B. Branch Circuits:
1. Copper:
a. Stranded for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. b. Stranded for No. 12 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 10 AWG and larger.
C. ASD Output Circuits Cable: Extra-flexible stranded for all sizes.
3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING
METHODS
A. Service Entrance: Conductor shall be provided by the utility company.
B. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:
Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 19 - 3
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
C. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:
Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points in accordance with Section 260533.13 "Conduits for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.
C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.
E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.
F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." G. Complete cable tray systems installation according to Section 260536 "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems" prior to installing conductors and cables.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.
B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inch of slack.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor.
3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 05 19 - 4
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
3.7 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.
2. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors and conductors feeding the following critical equipment and services for compliance with requirements:
3. Perform each of the following visual and electrical tests:
a. Inspect exposed sections of conductor and cable for physical damage and correct connection according to the single-line diagram.
b. Test bolted connections for high resistance using one of the following:
1) A low-resistance ohmmeter.
2) Calibrated torque wrench.
3) Thermographic survey.
c. Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and indentation. d. Inspect for correct identification.
e. Inspect cable jacket and condition.
f. Insulation-resistance test on each conductor for ground and adjacent conductors.
Apply a potential of 500 V(dc) for 300 V rated cable and 1000 V(dc) for 600 V rated cable for a one-minute duration.
g. Continuity test on each conductor and cable.
h. Uniform resistance of parallel conductors.
B. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports to record the following:
1. Procedures used.
2. Results that comply with requirements.
3. Results that do not comply with requirements, and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements.
END OF SECTION 260519
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 26 - 1
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
SECTION 26 05 26
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Grounding and bonding conductors.
2. Grounding and bonding clamps.
3. Grounding and bonding bushings.
4. Grounding and bonding hubs.
5. Grounding and bonding connectors.
6. Intersystem bonding bridge grounding connectors.
7. Grounding and bonding busbars.
8. Grounding (earthing) electrodes.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Product Listing: Include copy of unexpired approval letter, on letterhead of qualified electrical testing agency, certifying product's compliance with specified listing criteria. a. If listed manufacturer differs from selling manufacturer, indicate relationship between entities on submittal. Clearly indicate which entity warrants product performance and fitness for purpose.
b. Listing criteria identified in approval letter must match specified listing criteria. UL label indicating approval of equipment's enclosure is not considered approval of equipment for intended application.
c. Product identification in approval letter must match product branding and model numbers in submittal. Approval letters for discontinued or superseded products are unacceptable for submitted product.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's published instructions.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data:
a. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at grounding connections for service entrance equipment based on NFPA 70B.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 26 - 2
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
1) Tests must determine if ground-resistance or impedance values remain within specified maximums, and instructions must recommend corrective action if values do not.
2) Include recommended testing intervals.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Electrical Power Testing (EPT) Technician III: Possessing active NICET EPT Level III certification. Able to manage switching procedures, conduct tests of complex equipment, analyze test and equipment data, plan a job, and lead a team. Has experience performing NFPA 70B, IEEE, and NETA electrical tests.
1.6 SERVICE CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Electrical and ICT Equipment Grounding (Earthing): Do not exceed 10 Ω resistance to ground (earth).
1. Contact Architect for resolution if 10 Ω specified resistance to ground (earth) is not attained after second attempt to increase effectiveness of grounding (earthing) electrode.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING CONDUCTORS
A. Equipment Grounding Conductor:
1. Standard Features: 600 V, [THHN/THWN-2], copper wire or cable, green color, in accordance with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." B. ASTM - Bare Copper Grounding and Bonding Conductor:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. ERICO; brand of nVent Electrical plc.
b. Harger Lightning & Grounding; business of Harger, Inc.
2. Standard Features: Complying with one or more of the following:
a. Concentric-Lay Stranded Copper Conductor: ASTM B8.
2.2 GROUNDING AND BONDING CLAMPS
A. Description: Clamps suitable for attachment of grounding and bonding conductors to grounding electrodes, pipes, tubing, and rebar. Grounding and bonding clamps specified in this article are also suitable for use with communications applications.
B. UL KDER and KDSH - Hex-Fitting-Type Pipe and Rod Grounding and Bonding Clamp.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 26 - 3
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
a. ERICO; brand of nVent Electrical plc.
b. Harger Lightning & Grounding; business of Harger, Inc. c. Burndy; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. d. Grounding and Bonding Equipment for Communications: UL CCN KDSH; including UL 467.
2. Standard Features:
a. Two pieces with stainless steel bolts.
b. Clamp Material: Silicon bronze.
c. Listed for outdoor use.
2.3 GROUNDING AND BONDING BUSHINGS
A. Description: Bonding bushings connect conduit fittings, tubing fittings, threaded metal conduit, and unthreaded metal conduit to metal boxes and equipment enclosures and have one or more bonding screws intended to provide electrical continuity between bushing and enclosure.
Grounding bushings have provision for connection of bonding or grounding conductor and may or may not also have bonding screws.
B. UL KDER - Bonding Bushing
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Killark; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. b. O-Z/Gedney; brand of Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions, Appleton Group.
c. Raco Taymac Bell; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated.
2.4 GROUNDING AND BONDING HUBS
A. UL KDER - Grounding and Bonding Hub:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Burndy; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. b. Crouse-Hinds; brand of Eaton, Electrical Sector.
c. O-Z/Gedney; brand of Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions, Appleton Group.
2. Standard Features: Insulated, gasketed, watertight hub with mechanical-type wire terminal.
2.5 GROUNDING AND BONDING CONNECTORS
A. UL KDER - Lay-In Lug Mechanical-Type Grounding and Bonding Busbar Terminal:
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 26 - 4
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Chatsworth Products, Inc.
b. ILSCO.
c. Burndy; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated.
2. Standard Features: Mechanical-type, copper rated for direct burial terminal with set screw.
2.6 GROUNDING (EARTHING) ELECTRODES
A. UL KDER - Rod Electrode:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Continental Industries; brand of Hubbell Utility Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. b. ERICO; brand of nVent Electrical plc.
c. Harger Lightning & Grounding; business of Harger, Inc. d. Grounding and Bonding Equipment: UL CCN KDER; including UL 467.
2. Standard Features: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 ft.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine facility's grounding electrode system and equipment grounding for compliance with requirements for maximum ground-resistance level and other conditions affecting performance of grounding and bonding of electrical system.
B. Inspect test results of grounding system measured at point of electrical service equipment connection.
C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.
D. Proceed with connection of electrical service equipment only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 SELECTION OF GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS
A. Grounding and Bonding Conductors:
1. Provide solid conductor for 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.
2. Custom-Length Insulated Equipment Bonding Jumpers: 6 AWG, 19-strand, Type THHN.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 26 - 5
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
B. Grounding and Bonding Connectors:
1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise indicated.
3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.
4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.
C. Grounding and Bonding Busbars: Provide in electrical equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated on the Drawings.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF GROUNDING AND BONDING
A. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions.
B. Reference Standards:
1. Electrical Construction: ICC IBC, ICC IFC, NFPA 1, NFPA 70, and NECA NEIS 1.
2. Electrical Maintenance: NFPA 70B.
3. Electrical Safety: NFPA 70E.
4. Grounding and Bonding: NECA NEIS 331 and Article 250 of NFPA 70.
5. Emergency and Standby Power Work: NFPA 110, NFPA 111, and NECA NEIS 416.
6. Work in Confined Spaces: NFPA 350.
C. Special Techniques:
1. Grounding and Bonding Conductors:
a. Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
2. Grounding and Bonding Connectors: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact are galvanically compatible. a. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer in order of galvanic series. b. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. c. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless steel separators and mechanical clamps.
d. Make aluminum-to-galvanized-steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps.
e. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
f. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1) Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate adjacent parts.
2) Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 26 - 6
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
3) Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if disconnect-type connection is required, use bolted clamp.
g. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1) Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use bolted clamp connector or bolt lug-type connector to pipe flange by using one of lug bolts of flange. Where dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.
h. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install driven ground rod at base of each corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 ft apart.
3. Electrodes:
a. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inch below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated.
1) Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any.
2) Use exothermic welds for below-grade connections.
4. Grounding at Service:
a. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors must be connected to ground busbar. Install main bonding jumper between neutral and ground buses.
5. Grounding Separately Derived Systems:
a. Permanent Generators: Install grounding electrode(s) at location of permanent generators having switched neutral connections. Electrode must be connected to equipment grounding conductor and to frame of generator.
6. Equipment Grounding and Bonding:
a. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with feeders and branch circuits. b. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70:
1) Feeders and branch circuits.
2) Lighting circuits.
3) Receptacle circuits.
4) Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
5) Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
6) Flexible raceway runs.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 26 - 7
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR GROUNDING AND BONDING
A. Administrant for Electrical Power Tests and Inspections:
1. Engage qualified electrical testing and inspecting agency to administer and perform tests and inspections.
B. Field tests and inspections must be witnessed by owner or authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with calibrated torque wrench in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.
3. Test completed grounding system at each location where maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before conductors are connected. a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.
b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method in accordance with IEEE Std 81. c. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
D. Nonconforming Work:
1. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
2. Remove and replace defective components and retest.
E. Collect, assemble, and submit test and inspection reports.
1. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:
a. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less:
10 Ω.
b. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 5 Ω c. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 Ω.
d. Generator: 10 Ω.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. After installation, protect grounding and bonding cables and equipment from construction activities. Remove and replace items that are contaminated, defaced, damaged, or otherwise caused to be unfit for use prior to acceptance by Owner.
END OF SECTION 26 05 26
CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
26 05 33.13 - 1
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
SECTION 26 05 33.13
CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Type EMT duct raceways and elbows.
2. Type ENT duct raceways and fittings.
3. Type FMC duct raceways.
4. Type LFMC duct raceways.
5. Type PVC duct raceways and fittings.
6. Fittings for conduit, tubing, and cable.
7. Solvent cements.
8. Section 260519 "Low-Voltage for Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" specifies nonmetallic underground conduit with conductors (Type NUCC).
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Electrical Raceway Types:
1. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
2. EMT-A: Aluminum electrical metallic tubing.
3. EMT-S: Steel electrical metallic tubing.
4. EMT-SS: Stainless steel electrical metallic tubing.
5. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing.
6. EPEC: Electrical HDPE underground conduit (thin wall).
7. EPEC-A: Type A electrical HDPE underground conduit.
8. EPEC-B: Type B electrical HDPE underground conduit.
9. ERMC: Electrical rigid metal conduit.
10. ERMC-A: Aluminum electrical rigid metal conduit.
11. ERMC-S: Steel electrical rigid metal conduit.
12. ERMC-S-G: Galvanized-steel electrical rigid metal conduit.
13. ERMC-S-PVC: PVC-coated-steel electrical rigid metal conduit.
14. ERMC-SS: Stainless steel electrical rigid metal conduit.
15. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.
16. FMC-A: Aluminum flexible metal conduit.
17. FMC-S: Steel flexible metal conduit.
18. FMT: Steel flexible metallic tubing.
19. FNMC: Flexible nonmetallic conduit. See "LFNC."
20. HDPE: HDPE underground conduit (thick wall).
21. HDPE-40: Schedule 40 HDPE underground conduit.
22. HDPE-80: Schedule 80 HDPE underground conduit.
23. IMC: Steel electrical intermediate metal conduit.
24. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
25. LFMC-A: Aluminum liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
26. LFMC-S: Steel liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
27. LFMC-SS: Stainless steel liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
26 05 33.13 - 2
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
28. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.
29. LFNC-A: Layered (Type A) liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.
30. LFNC-B: Integral (Type B) liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.
31. LFNC-C: Corrugated (Type C) liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.
32. PVC: Rigid PVC conduit.
33. PVC-40: Schedule 40 rigid PVC conduit.
34. PVC-80: Schedule 80 rigid PVC Conduit.
35. PVC-A: Type A rigid PVC concrete-encased conduit.
36. PVC-EB: Type EB rigid PVC concrete-encased underground conduit.
37. RGS: See ERMC-S-G.
38. RMC: See ERMC.
39. RTRC: Reinforced thermosetting resin conduit.
40. RTRC-AG: Low-halogen, aboveground reinforced thermosetting resin conduit.
41. RTRC-AG-HW: Heavy wall, low-halogen, aboveground reinforced thermosetting resin conduit.
42. RTRC-AG-SW: Standard wall, low-halogen, aboveground reinforced thermosetting resin conduit.
43. RTRC-AG-XW: Extra heavy wall, low-halogen, aboveground reinforced thermosetting resin conduit.
44. RTRC-BG: Low-halogen, belowground reinforced thermosetting resin conduit.
B. Definitions:
1. Conduit: A structure containing one or more duct raceways.
2. Duct Raceway: A single enclosed raceway for conductors or cable.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Regulatory Requirements: Products or components listed and labeled in accordance with NFPA 70, by qualified electrical testing laboratory recognized by authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application.
2.2 TYPE EMT DUCT RACEWAYS AND ELBOWS
A. UL FJMX - Steel Electrical Metal Tubing (EMT-S) and Elbows:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Allied Tube & Conduit; Atkore International.
b. Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions.
c. Western Tube; Zekelman Industries.
CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
26 05 33.13 - 3
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
2. Listing Criteria: Investigated, labeled, and marked by qualified electrical testing laboratory in accordance with guide information and standards specified for the following UL product categories:
a. UL CCN FJMX; including UL 797.
3. Standard Features:
a. Material: Steel.
b. Exterior Coating: Alternate corrosion-resistant coating. c. Interior Coating: Zinc with organic top coating.
d. Minimum Trade Size: Metric designator 21 (trade size 3/4).
2.3 TYPE FMC DUCT RACEWAYS
A. UL DXUZ - Steel Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC-S):
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Anaconda Sealtite; Anamet Electrical, Inc.
b. Electri-Flex Company.
c. Penn Aluminum Conduit & EMT; Penn Aluminum International LLC; Berkshire Hathaway.
2. Listing Criteria: Investigated, labeled, and marked by qualified electrical testing laboratory in accordance with guide information and standards specified for the following UL product categories:
a. UL CCN DXUZ; including UL 1.
3. Standard Features:
a. Material: Steel.
b. Minimum Trade Size: Metric designator 21 (trade size 3/4).
2.4 TYPE LFMC DUCT RACEWAYS
A. UL DXHR - Steel Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC-S):
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Anaconda Sealtite; Anamet Electrical, Inc.
b. Electri-Flex Company.
c. International Metal Hose Co.
2. Listing Criteria: Investigated, labeled, and marked by qualified electrical testing laboratory in accordance with guide information and standards specified for the following UL product categories:
a. UL CCN DXHR; including UL 360.
CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
26 05 33.13 - 4
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
3. Standard Features:
a. Material: Steel.
b. Minimum Trade Size: Metric designator 21 (trade size 3/4).
2.5 TYPE PVC DUCT RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
A. UL DZYR - Schedule 40 Rigid PVC Conduit (PVC-40) and Fittings:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Calconduit; Atkore International.
b. JM Eagle.
c. National Pipe and Plastic, Inc. (Oldcastle).
2. Listing Criteria: Investigated, labeled, and marked by qualified electrical testing laboratory in accordance with guide information and standards specified for the following UL product categories:
a. UL CCN DZYR; including UL 651.
3. Standard Features:
a. Dimensional Specifications: Schedule 40.
b. Minimum Trade Size: Metric designator 21 (trade size 3/4). c. Markings: For use with maximum 90 deg C wire.
2.6 FITTINGS FOR CONDUIT, TUBING, AND CABLE
A. UL DWTT - Fittings for Type ERMC, and Type PVC Raceways:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Konkore Fittings; Atkore International.
b. O-Z/Gedney; brand of Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions, Appleton Group.
c. Southwire Company, LLC.
2. Listing Criteria: Investigated, labeled, and marked by qualified electrical testing laboratory in accordance with guide information and standards specified for the following UL product categories:
a. UL CCN DWTT; including UL 514B.
3. Standard Features:
a. Material: Steel.
b. Coupling Method: Compression coupling.
c. Expansion and Deflection Fittings: UL 651 with flexible bonding jumper. d.
CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
26 05 33.13 - 5
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
B. UL ILNR - Fittings for Type FMC Duct Raceways:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. American Fittings Corp. (AMFICO).
b. Liquid Tight Connector Co.
c. Southwire Company, LLC.
2. Listing Criteria: Investigated, labeled, and marked by qualified electrical testing laboratory in accordance with guide information and standards specified for the following UL product categories:
a. UL CCN ILNR; including UL 514B.Retain this article to require threaded joints and fittings to be treated with joint compound for improved conductivity, resistance to oxidation, and ease of assembly and disassembly. Note that plumbing compounds and tapes are not permitted by NFPA 70 because they are not conductive.
2.7 SOLVENT CEMENTS
A. UL VBEW - Solvent Cements for Nonmetallic Duct Raceways and Fittings:
1. Listing Criteria: Investigated, labeled, and marked by qualified electrical testing laboratory in accordance with guide information and standards specified for the following UL product categories:
a. Solvent Cements: UL CCN VBEW; including UL 340.
b. Solvent Cement Compatibility with PVC Conduit Fittings: UL CCN DWTT; including UL 514B. Follow solvent manufacturer's published instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SELECTION OF CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Unless more stringent requirements are specified in the Contract Documents or manufacturer's published instructions, comply with NFPA 70 for selection of duct raceways. Consult Architect for resolution of conflicting requirements.
B. Indoors:
1. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: ERMC.
2. Exposed and Subject to Physical Damage: ERMC.
3. Exposed and Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.
4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.
5. Damp or Wet Locations: ERMC.
6. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions.
B. Special Installation Techniques:
CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
26 05 33.13 - 6
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
1. General Requirements for Installation of Duct Raceways:
a. Complete duct raceway installation before starting conductor installation. b. Provide stub-ups through floors with coupling threaded inside for plugs, set flush with finished floor. Plug coupling until conduit is extended above floor to final destination or a minimum of 2 ft above finished floor.
c. Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends in conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which no more than equivalent of two 90-degree fewer bends are permitted. Support within 12 inch of changes in direction. d. Make bends in duct raceway using large-radius preformed ells except for parallel bends. Field bending must be in accordance with NFPA 70 minimum radii requirements. Provide only equipment specifically designed for material and size involved.
e. Conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. f. Support conduit within 12 inch of enclosures to which attached. g. Do not install duct raceways or electrical items on "explosion-relief" walls or rotating equipment.
h. Do not install conduits within 2 inch of the bottom side of a metal deck roof. i. Keep duct raceways at least 6 inch away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal duct raceway runs above water and steam piping.
j. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits metric designator 53 (trade size 2) and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length. Ream inside of conduit to remove burrs.
k. Install pull wires in empty duct raceways. Provide polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200 lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inch of slack at both ends of pull wire. Cap underground duct raceways designated as spare above grade alongside duct raceways in use.
l. Install duct raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures without hubs with locknuts on both sides of enclosure wall. Install locknuts hand tight, plus one-quarter turn more.
1) Termination fittings with shoulders do not require two locknuts.
2. Types EMT-S: Do not install aluminum duct raceways or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.
3. Types ERMC:
a. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound that maintains electrical conductivity to threads of duct raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's published instructions.
4. Types FMC, LFMC, and LFNC:
a. Provide a maximum of 36 inch of flexible conduit for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.
5. Types PVC:
a. Do not install Type PVC conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 122 deg F.
Conductor ratings must be limited to 75 deg C except where installed in a trench
CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
26 05 33.13 - 7
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
outside buildings with concrete encasement, where 90 deg C conductors are permitted.
b. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions for solvent welding and fittings. c. Join joints with solvent cement in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and allowed to cure before handling. Joints to be bent, pushed, or pulled must set for minimum 24 h after joining.
6. Duct Raceways Embedded in Slabs:
a. Arrange duct raceways to cross building expansion joints with expansion fittings at right angles to the joint.
b. Arrange duct raceways to ensure that each is surrounded by minimum of 2 inch of concrete without voids.
7. Duct Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration:
a. Provide insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than 4 AWG. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.
8. Duct Raceways Penetrating Rooms or Walls with Acoustical Requirements: Seal duct raceway openings on both sides of rooms or walls with acoustically rated putty or firestopping.
9. Identification: Provide labels for conduit assemblies, duct raceways, and associated electrical equipment.
a. Provide warning signs.
C. Interfaces with Other Work:
1. Firestop penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.
2. Provide conduit hangers and supports.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL OF CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Administrant for Electrical Power Tests and Inspections:
1. Engage factory-authorized service representative to administer and perform tests and inspections on components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
2. Administer and perform tests and inspections.
B. Administrant for Communications Tests and Inspections:
1. Administer and perform tests and inspections.
C. Field tests and inspections must be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform manufacturer's recommended tests and inspections.
2. Pull solid aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and adequate bend radii, and test for out-of-round duct. Provide minimum 12 inch long mandrel equal to duct size minus 1/4 inch. If obstructions are indicated, remove obstructions and retest.
3. Conduit Placement:
a. Verify that center-line location and offsets are in accordance with the Drawings. b. Verify that hangers and supports for conduits are attached to structure.
CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
26 05 33.13 - 8
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
c. Verify that nuts on bolts or hanger rods are secure. d. Verify that space between raceways and cored holes are filled with non-shrinking grout or other approved material indicated on the Drawings and the Specifications. e. Verify that expansion devices are installed at locations indicated on the Drawings and the Specifications.
f. Verify that ends are cut square to provide flush-butting surfaces when spliced and inside edges are free of burrs that could impede installation of cables. g. Verify minimum separation of utilities, or that approved mechanical protection has been provided to surrounding conduit(s) where minimum separation cannot be achieved.
4. Document all changes on Record Drawings.
E. Nonconforming Work:
1. Conduit will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
2. Remove and replace defective units and retest.
F. Field Quality-Control Reports: Collect, assemble, and submit test and inspection reports.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Verify that bentonite or other drilling fluids are contained and removed, and site is restored to its original or improved condition.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 26 05 33.13
BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33.16 - 1
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
SECTION 26 05 33.16
BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metallic outlet boxes, device boxes, rings, and covers.
2. Junction boxes and pull boxes.
3. Cover plates for device boxes.
4. Hoods for outlet boxes.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Communications Outlet: One or more communications jacks, or cables and plugs, mounted in a box or ring, with a suitable protective cover.
B. Enclosure: The case or housing of an apparatus, or the fence or wall(s) surrounding an installation, to prevent personnel from accidentally contacting energized parts or to protect the equipment from physical damage. Types of enclosure and enclosure covers include the following:
1. Cabinet: An enclosure that is designed for either surface mounting or flush mounting and is provided with a frame, mat, or trim in which a swinging door or doors are or can be hung.
2. Concrete Box: A box intended for use in poured concrete.
3. Conduit Body: A means for providing access to the interior of a conduit or tubing system through one or more removable covers at a junction or terminal point. In the United States, conduit bodies are listed in accordance with outlet box requirements.
4. Conduit Box: A box having threaded openings or knockouts for conduit, EMT, or fittings.
5. Cover Plate: A cover designed for protecting wiring devices installed in flush-mounted device boxes while permitting their safe operation; also called a faceplate or wallplate.
6. Cutout Box: An enclosure designed for surface mounting that has swinging doors or covers secured directly to and telescoping with the walls of the enclosure.
7. Device Box: A box with provisions for mounting a wiring device directly to the box.
8. Extension Ring: A ring intended to extend the sides of an outlet box or device box to increase the box depth, volume, or both.
9. Floor Box: A box mounted in the floor intended for use with a floor box cover and other components to complete the floor box enclosure.
10. Floor-Mounted Enclosure: A floor box and floor box cover assembly with means to mount in the floor that is sealed against the entrance of scrub water at the floor level.
11. Floor Nozzle: An enclosure used on a wiring system, intended primarily as a housing for a receptacle, provided with a means, such as a collar, for surface-mounting on a floor, which may or may not include a stem to support it above the floor level, and is sealed against the entrance of scrub water at the floor level.
12. Junction Box: A box with a blank cover that joins different runs of raceway or cable and provides space for connection and branching of the enclosed conductors.
BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33.16 - 2
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
13. Outlet Box: A box that provides access to a wiring system having pryout openings, knockouts, threaded entries, or hubs in either the sides or the back, or both, for the entrance of conduit, conduit or cable fittings, or cables, with provisions for mounting an outlet box cover, but without provisions for mounting a wiring device directly to the box.
14. Pedestal Floor Box Cover: A floor box cover that, when installed as intended, provides a means for typically vertical or near-vertical mounting of receptacle outlets above the floor's finished surface.
15. Pull Box: A box with a blank cover that joins different runs of raceway and provides access for pulling or replacing the enclosed cables or conductors.
16. Raised-Floor Box: A floor box intended for use in raised floors.
17. Recessed Access Floor Box: A floor box with provisions for mounting wiring devices below the floor surface.
18. Recessed Access Floor Box Cover: A floor box cover with provisions for passage of cords to recessed wiring devices mounted within a recessed floor box.
19. Ring: A sleeve, which is not necessarily round, used for positioning a recessed wiring device flush with the plaster, concrete, drywall, or other wall surface.
20. Ring Cover: A box cover, with raised center portion to accommodate a specific wall or ceiling thickness, for mounting wiring devices or luminaires flush with the surface.
21. Termination Box: An enclosure designed for installation of termination base assemblies consisting of bus bars, terminal strips, or terminal blocks with provision for wire connectors to accommodate incoming or outgoing conductors, or both.
C. Receptacle: A fixed connecting device arranged for insertion of a power cord plug. Also called a power jack.
D. Receptacle Outlet: One or more receptacles mounted in a box with a suitable protective cover.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's published instructions.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Electrical Power Testing (EPT) Technician III: Possessing active NICET EPT Level III certification. Able to manage switching procedures; conduct tests of complex equipment; analyze test and equipment data; plan a job; and lead a team. Has experience performing NFPA 70B, IEEE, and NETA electrical tests.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Regulatory Requirements: Products or components listed and labeled in accordance with NFPA 70, by qualified electrical testing laboratory recognized by authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application.
BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33.16 - 3
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
2.2 METALLIC OUTLET BOXES, DEVICE BOXES, RINGS, AND COVERS A. UL QCIT - Metallic Outlet Boxes and Covers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Hubbell Premise Wiring; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated.
b. O-Z/Gedney; brand of Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions, Appleton Group.
c. Pass & Seymour; Legrand North America, LLC.
2. Listing Criteria: Investigated, labeled, and marked by qualified electrical testing laboratory in accordance with guide information and standards specified for the following UL product categories:
a. UL CCN QCIT; including UL 514A.
3. Standard Features:
a. Box having pryout openings, knockouts, threaded entries, or hubs in either the sides or the back, or both, for entrance of conduit, conduit or cable fittings, or cables, with provisions for mounting outlet box cover, but without provisions for mounting wiring device directly to box.
b. Material: Sheet steel.
c. Sheet Metal Depth: Minimum 2.5 inch.
4. Other Available Features Required by the Project:
a. Luminaire Outlet Boxes and Covers: Nonadjustable, listed and labeled for attachment of luminaire weighing up to 50 lb.
B. UL QCIT - Metallic Conduit Bodies:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Killark; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. b. O-Z/Gedney; brand of Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions, Appleton Group.
c. Pass & Seymour; Legrand North America, LLC.
2. Listing Criteria: Investigated, labeled, and marked by qualified electrical testing laboratory in accordance with guide information and standards specified for the following UL product categories:
a. UL CCN QCIT; including UL 514A.
3. Standard Features: Means for providing access to interior of conduit or tubing system through one or more removable covers at junction or terminal point. In the United States, conduit bodies are listed in accordance with outlet box requirements.
BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33.16 - 4
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
C. UL QCIT - Metallic Device Boxes:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Hubbell Premise Wiring; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated.
b. Killark; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated. c. O-Z/Gedney; brand of Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions, Appleton Group.
2. Listing Criteria: Investigated, labeled, and marked by qualified electrical testing laboratory in accordance with guide information and standards specified for the following UL product categories:
a. UL CCN QCIT; including UL 514A.
3. Standard Features:
a. Box with provisions for mounting wiring device directly to box. b. Material: Sheet steel.
c. Sheet Metal Depth: minimum 2.5 inch.
D. UL QCIT - Metallic Extension Rings:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Hubbell Wiring Device-Kellems; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated.
b. O-Z/Gedney; brand of Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions, Appleton Group.
c. Pass & Seymour; Legrand North America, LLC.
2. Listing Criteria: Investigated, labeled, and marked by qualified electrical testing laboratory in accordance with guide information and standards specified for the following UL product categories:
a. UL CCN QCIT; including UL 514A.
3. Standard Features: Ring intended to extend sides of outlet box or device box to increase box depth, volume, or both.
2.3 JUNCTION BOXES AND PULL BOXES
A. UL BGUZ - Indoor Sheet Metal Junction and Pull Boxes:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Cooper B-line; brand of Eaton, Electrical Sector.
BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33.16 - 5
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
b. Hoffman; brand of nVent Electrical plc.
c. O-Z/Gedney; brand of Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions, Appleton Group.
2. Listing Criteria: Investigated, labeled, and marked by qualified electrical testing laboratory in accordance with guide information and standards specified for the following UL product categories:
a. UL CCN BGUZ; including UL 50 and UL 50E.
3. Standard Features:
a. Box with a blank cover that serves the purpose of joining different runs of raceway or cable.
b. Degree of Protection: Type 1.
c.
B. UL BGUZ - Outdoor Sheet Metal Junction and Pull Boxes:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Cooper B-line; brand of Eaton, Electrical Sector.
b. Hoffman; brand of nVent Electrical plc.
c. O-Z/Gedney; brand of Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions, Appleton Group.
2. Listing Criteria: Investigated, labeled, and marked by qualified electrical testing laboratory in accordance with guide information and standards specified for the following UL product categories:
a. UL CCN BGUZ; including UL 50 and UL 50E.
3. Standard Features:
a. Box with a blank cover that serves the purpose of joining different runs of raceway or cable.
b. Degree of Protection: Type 3R.
2.4 COVER PLATES FOR DEVICE BOXES
A. UL QCIT or QCMZ - Metallic Cover Plates for Device Boxes:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Arrow Hart, Wiring Devices; Eaton, Electrical Sector. b. Hubbell Wiring Device-Kellems; brand of Hubbell Electrical Solutions; Hubbell Incorporated.
c. O-Z/Gedney; brand of Emerson Electric Co., Automation Solutions, Appleton Group.
BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33.16 - 6
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
2. Listing Criteria: Investigated, labeled, and marked by qualified electrical testing laboratory in accordance with guide information and standards specified for the following UL product categories:
a. UL CCN QCIT or UL CCN QCMZ; including UL 514D.
3. Standard Features:
a. Cover plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match cover plate finish. b. Damp and Wet Locations: Listed, labeled, and marked for location and use.
Provide gaskets and accessories necessary for compliance with listing. c. Cover Plate Material: 0.032 inch thick, Type 302/304 non-magnetic stainless steel with brushed finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SELECTION OF BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Unless more stringent requirements are specified in Contract Documents or manufacturers' published instructions, comply with NFPA 70 for selection of boxes and enclosures. Consult Architect for resolution of conflicting requirements.
B. Degree of Protection:
1. Outdoors:
a. Type 3R unless otherwise indicated.
b. Locations Exposed to Hose down: Type 6P.
c. Locations Subject to Potential Flooding: Type 6P.
d. Locations in-Ground or Exposed to Corrosive Agents: Type 6P. e. Locations in-Ground or Exposed to Corrosive Agents Where Mechanism Must Operate When Ice Covered: Type 3SX.
2. Indoors:
a. Type 1 unless otherwise indicated.
b. Damp or Dusty Locations: Type 12.
c. Locations Exposed to Airborne Dust, Lint, Fibers, or Flyings: Type 6. d. Locations Exposed to Hosedown: Type 6P.
e. Locations Exposed to Brief Submersion: Type 6P.
f. Locations Exposed to Prolonged Submersion: Type 6P.
g. Locations Exposed to Corrosive Agents: Type 6P.
h. Locations Exposed to Spraying Oil or Coolants: Type 13.
C. Exposed Boxes Installed Less Than 2.5 m (8 ft) Above Floor:
1. Boxes with knockouts or unprotected openings are prohibited.
2. Provide exposed cover. Flat covers with angled mounting slots or knockouts are prohibited.
BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33.16 - 7
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
3.2 INSTALLATION OF BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions.
B. Reference Standards for Installation: Unless more stringent installation requirements are specified in Contract Documents or manufacturers' published instructions, comply with the following:
1. Electrical Construction: ICC IBC, ICC IFC, NFPA 1, NFPA 70, and NECA NEIS 1.
2. Electrical Safety: NFPA 70E.
3. Commissioning of Active and Passive Fire Protection Features: NFPA 3 and NFPA 4.
4. Grounding and Bonding: NECA NEIS 331 and Article 250 of NFPA 70.
5. Communications Work: BICSI N1.
6. Life Safety and Means of Egress Work: NFPA 101.
7. Emergency and Standby Power Work: NFPA 110, NFPA 111, and NECA NEIS 416.
8. Work in Confined Spaces: NFPA 350.
9. Work in Basements and Other Developed Subterranean Spaces: NFPA 520.
10. Outlet, Device, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Article 314 of NFPA 70.
11. Consult Architect for resolution of conflicting requirements.
C. Special Installation Techniques:
1. Provide boxes in wiring and raceway systems wherever required for pulling of wires, making connections, and mounting of devices or fixtures.
2. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.
3. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box, whether installed indoors or outdoors.
4. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.
5. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.
6. Support boxes in recessed ceilings independent of ceiling tiles and ceiling grid.
7. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for purpose.
8. Fasten junction and pull boxes to, or support from, building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.
9. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
10. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
11. Do not install aluminum boxes, enclosures, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.
12. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to ensure a continuous ground path.
13. Boxes and Enclosures in Areas or Walls with Acoustical Requirements:
a. Seal openings and knockouts in back and sides of boxes and enclosures with acoustically rated putty.
b. Provide gaskets for cover plates and covers.
D. Interfaces with Other Work:
1. Identification: Provide labels for boxes and associated electrical equipment.
BOXES AND COVERS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33.16 - 8
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
a. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components. b. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate. c. Provide warning signs and arc-flash hazard warning labels for electrical equipment.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL OF BOXES AND COVERS
A. Administrant for Electrical Power Tests and Inspections:
1. Administer and perform tests and inspections.
B. Field tests and inspections must be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform manufacturer's recommended tests and inspections.
2. Perform tests and inspections recommended by standards listed in "Reference Standards for Installation" Paragraph.
D. Nonconforming Work:
1. Boxes and covers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
2. Remove and replace defective units and retest.
E. Field Quality-Control Reports: Collect, assemble, and submit test and inspection reports.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove construction dust and debris from boxes before installing cover plates, covers, and hoods.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. After installation, protect boxes from construction activities. Remove and replace items that are contaminated, defaced, damaged, or otherwise caused to be unfit for use prior to acceptance by Owner.
END OF SECTION 26 05 33.16
SURFACE RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33.23 - 1
Carlsbad Police and Fire HQ – Chiller Replacement
SECTION 26 05 33.23
SURFACE RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Surface metal raceways and fittings.
2. Strut-type channel raceways and fittings.
3. Wireways and auxiliary gutters.